Location Intelligence Geographic Information Systems. MapMarker Plus. Version 29. User Guide

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "Location Intelligence Geographic Information Systems. MapMarker Plus. Version 29. User Guide"

Transcription

1 Location Intelligence Geographic Information Systems MapMarker Plus Version 29 User Guide

2 Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its representatives. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, without the written permission of Pitney Bowes, One Global View, Troy, New York Pitney Bowes All rights reserved. MapInfo, Group 1 Software, Centrus, and MapMarker are trademarks of Pitney Bowes All other marks and trademarks are property of their respective holders. Contact information for all Pitney Bowes Inc. offices is located at:: Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries. The following trademarks are owned by the United States Postal Service: LACS Link, Suite Link, DPV, ZIP + 4, ZIP Code, ZIP, CASS, CASS Certified, Post Office, P.O. Box USPS, U.S. Postal Service and United States Postal Service. Pitney Bowes is a non-exclusive DPV and LACS Link Licensee of the United States Postal Service AD#1.08 Portions 2016 TomTom Inc HERE. All rights reserved Shapefile C Library v is licensed under the MIT Style License. The license can be downloaded from: Frank Warmerdam. The source code for this library is available from. August 2016

3 Table of Contents 1 - Introduction 5 What Is Geocoding? 6 What Is MapMarker? 6 MapMarker Features 7 MapMarker Documentation Set 14 MapMarker Streets 16 Getting Technical Support Geocoding with MapMarker 18 Geocoding Terminology 19 Understanding the Geocoding Process 23 Running MapMarker Overview 35 Opening and Running a Project 35 Opening a Table or Text File 36 Exporting to Shapefiles 41 Selecting Input and Output Address Columns 43 Geocoding Your Table Automatically 48 Geocoding Your Table Interactively 49 Intersection Geocoding 53 Using Single Line Addresses in Geocoding 55 Using Address Range Geocoding 57 Postal Geocoding 59 Geographic Geocoding 59 Displaying Geocoded Records in MapInfo Professional 60 Re-Geocoding a Table 61 Using Geocoding Options 62 Saving TAB Files 77 Creating and Saving a Project MapMarker System Preferences 82 Setting System Preferences 83 Startup Preferences 83 Dictionary Preferences 84 Offset System Preferences 85 Maps System Preferences Match Settings and Strategies 88 Using Match Settings to Control Geocoding Precision 89 Choosing Match Strategies 89 Using a Multiple Pass Strategy 91 Specifying Match Settings 92 Viewing Match Candidates on a Map 94 A Closer Look at Multiple Matches Result Codes 97 Understanding Result Codes 98 Best Match From Multiple Candidates (M category) 102 Postal Centroid Matches (Z category) 103 Geographic Matches (G category) 103 Reverse Geocoded Matches (R category) 104 Non-match Codes (N category) 104 Using the Georesult Dialog Specialized Geocoding Features 108 CASS Geocoding 109 LACS Link 112 DPV 115 DPV and LACS Link Usage Guidelines and Requirements 121 Link Suite 124 Returning Abbreviated Addresses 125 Returning Abbreviated City Names 126 Geocoding Dual Addresses 127 Geocoding Remote Tables 128 Geocoding dbase Files 129 Geocoding Delimited, CSV, and SHP Files 129 Using Quick Geocode 129 Finding Address with Quick Find 130 Finding Airports with Locate Airport 140 Finding Highway Exits with Locate Highway Exit 142 Batch Geocoding 142 Table Attribution with MapMarker 147 Adding Attributes to Your Table Geocoding Remote Tables 157 Supported Databases 158 Remote Tables and Spatial Objects 158 Preparing to Geocode Remote Databases 159 Accessing a Remote Table for Geocoding 160 Writing Geocoding Output to Another Table 161 Additional Considerations for Remote Table Geocoding 166 A - Frequently Asked Questions 169 Frequently Asked Questions 170 MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 3

4 Table of Contents B - MapMarker User Interface Reference 174 MapMarker Menu Commands and Toolbar Buttons 175 MapMarker Dialogs 184 C - Creating a Map Catalog Manually245 Manually Creating a MapInfo Map Catalog 246 Adding Rows to the MapInfo_MapCatalog 247 D - MapMarker Utility Programs 252 FindAddress 253 User Dictionary Utility 254 E - U.S. ZIP Code Ranges 262 ZIP Code Ranges 263 F - Match Codes and Location Codes266 Match Codes 267 Location Codes 274 Using Status Codes 286 MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 4

5 1 1 Introduction Welcome to MapMarker USA, one of the premier address matching and geocoding offerings from Pitney Bowes. MapMarker USA enables you to assign geographic coordinates to large tables of American address records in a single session. In this chapter: What Is Geocoding? 6 What Is MapMarker? 6 MapMarker Features 7 MapMarker Documentation Set 14 MapMarker Streets 16 Getting Technical Support 16

6 Introduction What Is Geocoding? Geocoding is the process of assigning geographic coordinates to data that contain addresses. The coordinates assigned to each address turn each record into a geographic object that can be displayed on a map using MapInfo Professional or MapXtreme. Geocoding turns ordinary data records containing address information into geographic objects that can be displayed on a map. A list of customers, stores, or anything with a street address or postal code may be matched using the comprehensive street and postal code files provided in the Address Dictionary. The result of geocoding is an xy coordinate linked to a specific address. When displayed, this enables you to better visualize the relationships in your data. You can display coordinates by creating maps in MapInfo Professional or via MapXtreme and add to other map objects to give your data a geographic reference. You can then perform a wide variety of functions to analyze your data in geographic terms. Data that once was only readable in column and row format can be now viewed with a whole new perspective, thereby disclosing patterns and clusters you never knew existed. Visualizing your records on a map can make the relationships among your data clearer. You can display your geocoded records against a street map, a postal centroid map, a local map, or whatever is most appropriate to your needs. You can then use the wide variety of functions available in MapInfo mapping software to perform querying, create thematic maps, create territories, and perform many other types of geographic analysis. Beyond visualizing data on a map, location data can be leveraged in many ways. See Location Inte lligence products and related parts of the Pitney Bowes web site for details on how your organization can use location information to make better decisions. What Is MapMarker? MapMarker is a powerful geocoding tool produced by Pitney Bowes MapMarker enables you to assign geographic coordinates to large tables of U.S.-based address records in a single session. This is a key step toward mapping and analyzing your business data. MapMarker adds geographic coordinates to every record in your database that it matches against its comprehensive Address Dictionary, a database of USPS street addresses, street geometry and the latest ZIP + 4 centroids. MapMarker assigns coordinates to an address based on how well it matched in the Address Dictionary. The precision of the match can vary. For each address you geocode, you may get back a single perfect, street-level match, a list of street-level match candidates from which you choose the best match. You may get a less precise match, for example a ZIP Code centroid match if you provided a ZIP Code or a city-level centroid match. To identify the match precision, MapMarker also returns a result code for each address that it geocodes. The precision that you require for your geocoded records depends on how you plan to use your data. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 6

7 Introduction In addition to being a powerful geocoder, MapMarker is also a suite of tools that allows you to standardize your U.S. addresses, add spatial information and create points for your records, develop standalone or client/server custom geocoding applications, and embed MapMarker functionality in existing applications. The MapMarker Desktop application, MapMarker server, and MapMarker developer tools have geocoding capabilities that allow you to add geocoding functionality to your own desktop or Web application. MapMarker Features MapMarker USA allows a great deal of flexibility in geocoding. This section briefly describes the major features of MapMarker USA. This does not completely summarize all the MapMarker features and capabilities. See the MapMarker USA Release Notes for new features, Address Dictionary updates, and behavioral changes that you may notice with MapMarker. The Release Notes also describe fixes to customer-reported issues and known issues that customers must be aware of. The MapMarker USA Release Notes are located at the Pitney Bowes site. MapMarker Installer The MapMarker USA 29 installer is designed to simplify the installation and provide more feedback during installation. The installer accommodates: Typical and custom installs Upgrading software and data or upgrading data only Silent installation and modification Selecting and installing the JVM Installing the sample application (for Server installation) Selecting default and custom locations for installing software and data Choosing shortcut locations Uninstalling MapMarker Note: You must have administrator rights to install MapMarker software. This is true for all operating systems. Street Level Geocoding If you select the street level geocoding operation, MapMarker will match your full address record against its Address Dictionary and/or User Dictionary (If you have created and selected a User Dictionary.). This process will correct misspelled street addresses and city/town names. It can also correct postal code information, or add postcodes if your data does not already include them. After MapMarker completes the address cleaning step, it will geocode your records in accordance with the other preferences you have set. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 7

8 Introduction Addresses that are geocoded to a street level return an S or M result code. See Result Codes for a description of these and other result codes. Intersection Geocoding MapMarker USA can geocode to street intersections. Using any of several ways to designate a street intersection, MapMarker can find the position of the intersection of two street segments within a given postal code or city. See Intersection Geocoding. Addresses that are geocoded to an intersection return an SX result code. See Result Codes for a description of all result codes. PlaceName Geocoding PlaceNames are included in the data and can be geocoded by MapMarker USA. PlaceNames can include business names, building names, government offices, or other companies and organizations that are included in the data source of the MapMarker USA Address Dictionary. PlaceName geocoding is also supported by User Dictionaries. You can create and implement User Dictionaries based on your own data or third-party data sources. Your custom data may include place names, intersections, airports, business or organization names, building names, or any other POI (Point of Interest) that you want to use for geocoding purposes. Unformatted (Single-line) Address Input MapMarker can geocode single line addresses, in which all address components appear on a single line rather than in separate fields. Address Cleansing MapMarker USA can successfully geocode many addresses even if the addressing is less than perfect. For example, the USPS may identify several official and unofficial locality names for a single postal code (especially in urban areas). MapMarker USA can interpret addresses that refer to official (gazetted) or unofficial locality names, but will return the official locality name in the address cleansing process. Postcode Geocoding If you choose Postcode Geocoding, MapMarker will geocode your records based on their postal code in accordance with the other preferences you have set. You can also fallback to Postcode geocoding if a street level match was not possible. A postal code represents an area (polygon). A postal code can be related to one locality, or to multiple localities in metropolitan areas. In some regions (such as Northern Territory) this may not be true. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 8

9 Introduction USPS may identify several official and unofficial locality names for a single postal code (especially in urban areas). MapMarker USA can interpret addresses that refer to official (gazetted) or unofficial locality names, but will always return the official locality name in the address cleansing process. Addresses that are geocoded to a postal code return a Z result code. See Postal Centroid Matches (Z category) for a description of Z result codes. Geographic Geocoding If the input address consists of a valid combination of city and state, but no further address information, you can still geocode to the city centroid. You can also fallback to Geographic geocoding if a street level match was not possible. MapMarker USA can interpret addresses that refer to official (gazetted) or unofficial locality names, but will always return the official locality name in the address cleansing process. Addresses that are geocoded to a geography return a G result code. See Geographic Matches (G category) for a description of G result codes. Reverse Geocoding With reverse geocoding, you can provide X/Y (Longitude/Latitude) coordinates and MapMarker USA 29 returns the closest address for that location. Note: Reverse geocoding is available with the Developer (Server) edition only (not with the Desktop application). See the MapMarker USA Developer Guide for relevant information on reverse geocoding. You can perform reverse geocoding using street segment or point address dictionaries. Addresses that are reverse geocoded return an RS result code. See Chapter 5 Result Codes for a description of all result codes. Address Dictionaries The default Address Dictionary is based on TomTom Street data and USPS sources. This includes millions of American street addresses and placenames with corresponding address range, street geometry and postal code data and is used for matching addresses and assigning coordinates during the geocoding process. This Address Dictionary can be purchased and licensed for all of USA or for individual regions. A number of other street range and point-based Address Dictionaries are available. See the MapMarker USA Release Notes provided with your product. These Release Notes and other documentation are also located at the Pitney Bowes site for information on the available Address Dictionaries and data vintages for your version of MapMarker USA. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 9

10 Introduction Multiple File Formats as Input Data MapMarker USA reads any MapInfo table (TAB format), CSV, delimited text files (TXT), fixed-width text files, or any dbase (DBF) format table. MapMarker supports multiple character sets for dbase files. In addition, MapMarker, via Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) can geocode data stored in remote databases, including Microsoft Access, Microsoft SQL Server, and Oracle using the X and Y data type. User Dictionaries A User Dictionary is similar to the provided Address Dictionary, but it is created by the user from their own source data. User-defined dictionaries can contain a variety of customized address-related data that may provide improved address matching rates and add value to the address validation and geocoding process. User Dictionaries can also be based on parcel/point data, which can provide an even higher level of geocoding accuracy. You can create any number of custom dictionaries. User Dictionaries can be used in combination with or in preference to the Address Dictionary. See User Dictionary Utility on page 254. Attribution You can add attribute values from other tables as part of a geocoding pass, or as a separate process. For example, MapMarker can attach information (such as lifestyle codes), stored in a boundary or point file to a record in your database when it makes a match. All that is necessary is a common link between the two tables. Automatic and Interactive Geocoding MapMarker USA runs in both automatic and interactive mode. You can use either automatic or interactive geocoding or you can combine these techniques in multiple geocoding passes to optimize your results. Batch Geocoding MapMarker USA supports batch geocoding for processing one or more tables without user interaction. This feature is useful for overnight processing of large databases or when a table is updated regularly. See Creating a Project-Based Batch File. Saving and Using Project Files You can create MapMarker projects to preserve all current geocoding settings, matching and fallback preferences, table attributes settings, and system preferences. Project files also provide a way to do batch geocoding on delimited text files and fixed-width text files. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 10

11 Introduction See Creating and Saving a Project for information on opening a project and creating a project. Display Geocoded Points on Map MapMarker can create point objects for geocoded records automatically. You can display the points using MapInfo mapping software (such as MapInfo Professional.). Optionally, MapMarker can write the X and Y coordinates directly to your table. Points created with MapMarker will overwrite any points already existing in the table. See the Viewing Match Candidates on a Map for information on viewing candidates on a map. Quick Find and Browsing The Quick Find Feature in the Desktop application enables you to quickly geocode a single address or business name without using the Geocode dialog. The Quick Find dialog is located under the Search menu of the Desktop application. Enter the address information in the Quick Find dialog and click Search. MapMarker returns geocoding results based on the currently set geocoding preferences. You can also use the Quick Find dialog to browse the Address Dictionary for the correct spelling of a street name or business. Provide the postal code and at least the first letter of the street or business and click Browse. The city/town and state fields are optional. MapMarker returns a list of streets or businesses that meet your criteria. Browsing does not geocode the record, but you can use the browse results to confirm and correct your address and then geocode based on this information. See the Finding Address with Quick Find for information on the Quick Find feature. Result Codes MapMarker USA returns a result code for each record it attempts to match. This enables you to see whether a match was made, which dictionary was the source of the match, and how precisely each address component matched. The result codes are stored in your table. When the records display in a Map window, each result code is represented by a colorcoded symbol. This allows you to visually recognize the precision level and distribution of the matches. See Result Codes. Match Codes and Location Codes MapMarker USA returns match codes that indicate the parts of the address were matched (or what address parts were changed to achieve the match). MapMarker also returns location codes that indicate the locational accuracy of the assigned geocode. See Match Codes and Location Codes. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 11

12 Introduction Segment IDs Segment IDs are numeric codes that uniquely identify each point or street centroid candidate. The MapMarker USA 29 geocoder returns the Segment ID for each S8, S7, S6, S5 and S4 candidate (providing that the segment ID information is available in the Address dictionary. Note: Segment IDs are available with the Developer (Server) product only (not with the Desktop application). Wide Search You can increase the probability of a match by using Relaxed mode in combination with wide search. Wide search considers all streets that begin with the first letter of the input street name, and therefore can identify more potential candidates. Wide search is supported at both the API level and in the Desktop application. You can set wide search in the Match Settings dialog on page 213 and the Quick Find Settings dialog on page 225. See Using Wide Search with Multiple Pass Strategy on page 74 for an explanation of using this feature. Centerline Offset for Point Candidates If a point candidate is returned from a point dictionary, you can return the coordinates at a specified offset from the associated street segment (rather than at the original point). This feature is available if you are using a point-based Address Dictionary (Centrus Points, TomTom Points, or NAVTEQ Point Addressing, or Master Location data) in combination with a street segment dictionary. See Address Dictionaries for an overview of the available Address Dictionaries. A street range Address Dictionary must also be available so that an offset from the segment is possible. When possible, the coordinates are offset perpendicularly from the associated street segment. If there is no street range dictionary in addition to the point-based dictionary, then the original point candidate is returned. Centerline offset can be specified in feet, miles, meters, kilometers, and other supported units. The default setting is 25 feet for USA and 7 meters for other countries. A centerline offset candidate has an SC result code rather than an S8 (for example: SCHPNTSCZA). The C indicates that the point has been moved a specified distance along the centerline. The centerline offset capability is disabled by default, but you can enable and control it through the Offset Preferences dialog. See Offset System Preferences. Expanded Search MapMarker USA implements expanded search, which allows MapMarker to search for an address within a given radius of the input address. Expanded search helps to find a match when the input address contains limited or inaccurate city or ZIP Code information. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 12

13 Introduction Expanded search is not implemented by default, but is supported at both the API level and in the Desktop application. You can set expanded search in the Match Settings dialog on page 213 and the Quick Find Settings dialog on page 225. See Using Expanded Search on page 72 for an explanation of using this feature. Search Level Constraints for Finance Area and City You can specify if you want the search area based on a Finance Area or on an area defined by the city, state, and ZIP Code. These constraints are supported at both the API level and in the Desktop application. You can set these search level constraints in the Match Settings dialog on page 213 and the Quick Find Settings dialog on page 225. CASS Mode automatically uses the Finance Area constraint by default. All other match modes use City search level by defaults. MapMarker Desktop Application The MapMarker Desktop application can be installed on a single machine, or on a network to be shared by other users. The Desktop application gives you a great deal of control over the geocoding process. Following is a partial list of MapMarker Desktop application features: Supports a number of different file formats, including MapInfo TAB files, DBF files, CSV, delimited text files (TXT), and ESRI Shapefiles (SHP). See Supported File Formats on page 24. Geocode interactively (you make the final decision if it is a match) to maximize the number of matches and to control error rate. Geocode a portion of your table using the Quick Geocode feature. Geocode a large database of addresses in batch mode. Geocode a portion of your table using the Quick Geocode feature. Geocode to street address ZIP Code centroids or to street intersections. Identify result codes quickly tell how the address match was made and how precise the match is. Standardize addresses to meet USPS CASS. See CASS Geocoding for a description of Coding Accuracy Support System requirements using MapMarker Address Dictionary. Use DPV. See Using DPV for a description of using Delivery Point Validation in conjunction with CASS to verify whether an address is a valid USPS delivery point. Geocode remote tables via ODBC. Note: CASS and DPV functionality are available with MapMarker. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 13

14 Introduction MapMarker Server MapMarker Server is a server-based engine that is designed to be integrated into business processes. The Server product enables multiple simultaneous geocoding requests to be served from a single MapMarker engine. Developer Tools The MapMarker Server product includes developer tools provides a Java API and an XML (.NET Framework) API. Developers can use these tools to build and deploy client/server or standalone geocoding applications. Integration with MapInfo Professional MapInfo Professional users can run MapMarker USA or Envinsa or later as a geocoding service from within MapInfo Professional 8.5 or later. This direct connection enables users to take advantage of MapMarker address validation and geocoding capabilities within the powerful MapInfo Professional mapping and analysis environment. MapMarker Documentation Set The documentation set for MapMarker includes PDF and online resources to help you make the most of the product. The set includes: MapMarker User Guide in PDF format. Online Help for the MapMarker Desktop application. MapMarker Developer Guide in PDF format. Release Notes that provide updated information on new features, behavioral changes in the software, fixes for customer-reported issues, and known issues. To see these Release Notes and other MapMarker documentation, go to the Product Documentation page on the Pitney Bowes Business Insight web site. MapMarker User Guide This guide is designed to help you use MapMarker to the fullest. It introduces you to the product, and explains how to use the MapMarker Desktop application. Coverage includes: Geocoding in MapMarker Using system preferences Configuring settings for optimum geocoding results Explaining result codes Geocoding remote tables Creating a customized user dictionary MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 14

15 Introduction The User Guide also contains a chapter on more specialized features, including CASS geocoding and DPV ; finding airports, highway exits, single address geocoding, batch geocoding, and table attribution. This guide also includes appendixes that provide reference information for MapMarker. User Interface Reference Illustrates and explains the dialogs, buttons, and menu commands in the MapMarker user interface. Creating a Map Catalog Describes how to create a Map Catalog manually so that you can make remote tables mappable. MapMarker Utility Programs Explains the FindAddress and User Dictionary utilities. Frequently Asked Questions A list of frequently asked questions. MapMarker Program Files A list of the files that are installed with MapMarker. U.S. ZIP Code Ranges A list of the ZIP Code ranges in the United States. Online Help In addition to the User Guide, MapMarker includes online help for the Desktop application. Online help is instantly available while you are running MapMarker or the installation wizard. To access help, either select the Help menu, press the F1 key, or click Help for help about a dialog. MapMarker USA Developer Guide This explains the server and API components of the developer product. This also describes and illustrates the sample application, a Java client that illustrates how to geocode American addresses. MapMarker Release Notes The MapMarker Release Notes are posted to the Pitney Bowes web site, and contain a brief summary of the following: New features Operating requirements Bug fixes Known issues Publications on the Web The MapMarker documentation and Release Notes are available from the page on the Pitney Bowes we b site. Documentation on the web site may be updated if corrections are necessary or if new information becomes available. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 15

16 Introduction MapMarker Streets Once you have geocoded your table you can display geocoded points in the MapMarker Desktop application through Candidate Visualization. You may want to add other layers of information to your map to give your records a geographic reference. MapMarker Streets is a U.S. network of fast displaying streets, highways, municipal boundaries, water features, and points of interest to complement your MapMarker geocoded data. MapMarker Streets is provided on separate media with your MapMarker product. Getting Technical Support Pitney Bowes offers a free support period on all new software purchases and upgrades, so you can be productive from the start. Remember to provide your serial number, partner number, or customer agreement number when contacting Technical Support. Contact the technical support personnel for your area: The Americas Support: Fax: software.support@pb.com Hours: Monday - Friday from 8:00am - 7:00pm EST, excluding company holidays. Europe/Middle East/Africa: Support: Fax: software.support@pb.com Hours: Monday - Friday from 9am to 5pm GMT, excluding company holidays. Asia-Pacific Headquarters Support: Hours: Monday Friday from 8:00am and 6:00pm (EST) Australian Eastern Standard Time, excluding company holidays. Fax: Main Office Phone (Sydney): software.support@pb.com Before You Call Have the following information ready when contacting us for assistance on MapMarker: 1. Serial Number. You must have a registered serial number to receive Technical Support. 2. Your name and organization. The person calling must be the contact person listed on the support agreement. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 16

17 Introduction 3. Version of the product you are calling about. 4. The operating system name and version. 5. A brief explanation of the problem. Some details that can be helpful in this context are: Error messages Context in which the problem occurs Consistency is the problem occurring consistently or erratically? The Support Tracking System The Support Tracking System is used internally by the Technical Support department to manage and track customer issues. The system also has the ability to track calls with accountability. This system helps Tech Support respond to all customer issues quickly and effectively. Expected Response Time Most issues can be resolved during the customer s initial call. If quick resolution is not possible, a response is issued before the end of the business day. A Technical Support representative will provide you with the status each business day until the issue is resolved. Support requests submitted by are handled using the same guidelines as telephone support requests. However, there is an unavoidable delay of up to several hours for message transmission and recognition. Exchanging Information Occasionally a Technical Support representative will ask you to provide sample data in order to duplicate your scenario. In the case of our developer tools, a small subset of sample code may be requested to help duplicate the issue. The preferred method of exchanging information is either via or our FTP site. Use the following address: Globally software.support@pb.com Accessing the Pitney Bowes FTP site For information regarding our FTP site, contact Technical Support. If information cannot be provided electronically, Pitney Bowes also accepts information in the following media formats: CD DVD Software Defects If the issue is recognized as a defect in the software, the Technical Support representative will log the issue in our incident database and assign an incident number that can be used for tracking purposes. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 17

18 2 2 Geocoding with MapMarker After you have prepared your address data, you are ready to geocode your table. This chapter describes how to run MapMarker and how to start geocoding your records. This chapter also describes the basic geocoding workflow and illustrates the major MapMarker geocoding features. In this chapter: Geocoding Terminology 19 Understanding the Geocoding Process 23 Running MapMarker Overview 35 Opening and Running a Project 35 Opening a Table or Text File 36 Exporting to Shapefiles 41 Selecting Input and Output Address Columns 43 Geocoding Your Table Automatically 48 Geocoding Your Table Interactively 49 Intersection Geocoding 53 Using Single Line Addresses in Geocoding 55 Using Address Range Geocoding 57 Postal Geocoding 59 Geographic Geocoding 59 Displaying Geocoded Records in MapInfo Professional 60 Re-Geocoding a Table 61 Using Geocoding Options 62 Saving TAB Files 77

19 Geocoding with MapMarker Geocoding Terminology MapMarker products use a common set of geocoding terms. We use these terms consistently in the MapMarker documentation, and describe the terms more fully where appropriate. Geocoding Terminology Term Definition address address dictionary Information that identifies the location of a site, for example, a home or business. The search dictionary used for matching addresses during geocoding. address interpolation A mathematical means of estimating an address location based on a street segment and the address ranges associated with that segment. This method of interpolation assigns coordinates to address records in relation to the position of address point candidates in the data, providing greater positional accuracy to the geocoded points. candidate An address record that is a potential match to the input address information. A candidate is returned by the geocoding process. See also geocoding. CASS Coding Accuracy Support System. This is a process by which mailing addresses are standardized to meet U.S. Postal Service requirements for bulk mailing discounts. When CASS mode is enabled, MapMarker will perform this address standardization under strict matching conditions set by the USPS. Geocoding in CASS mode matches records to the exact house number, street name, and ZIP Code. Other geocoding preferences are overridden. Note: Single line address processing is not available in CASS mode. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 19

20 Geocoding with MapMarker Geocoding Terminology (Continued) Term Definition centroid A point at the calculated center of a polygon, often used to attach attribute information to an area. The centroid is used for labeling and geocoding. For an irregularly shaped area, region, or polygon, the centroid is derived mathematically and is weighted to locate the point at the approximate "center of gravity." close match CMRA DPV EWS If an input address corresponds closely to one or more known records in the address dictionary, then the returned candidates are considered close matches. The specified matching criteria may include house number, street name, city name, locality, or postal code. Commercial Mail Receiving Agencies Delivery Point Validation. DPV is technology available from the U.S. Postal Service. Used in conjunction with CASS mode geocoding, DPV enables you to verify whether an address is a deliverable USPS address. Early Warning System. The EWS file contains addresses that did not make it into the current USPS update, and therefore do not match. Records that have no match because they are in the EWS file can be flagged in the EWS output column. EWS usage is not required for CASS discounts. The EWS file is shipped as a file named ews.niu (not in use) and installed in the Data folder. If you want to use EWS processing, rename this file as ews.txt. Otherwise EWS will not be used. geocoding geographic geocoding The process determining the X and Y coordinates of a location by its address. Candidate coordinates are based on state, county, or city centroids. This not very precise, but may be suitable for certain applications. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 20

21 Geocoding with MapMarker Geocoding Terminology (Continued) Term LACS Link Definition Locatable Address Conversion System. LACS Link allows business mailers to electronically update their rural-style addresses with locatable street-style addresses resulting from 911 emergency response address conversions. For example, and address like RR 1 Box 32 might be converted to a street-style address like 141 Morrison Ave. location code match code match strategy The geocoding engine returns location code for each record it matches or attempts to match. Location codes indicate the accuracy of the assigned geocode. Location codes begin with an A (Address location), S (street centroid) Z (ZIP + 4 centroid), or G (geographic centroid). See Appendix F: Location Codes. The geocoding engine returns a match code for each record it matches or attempts to match. Match codes allow you to determine the quality of the address match and indicate what type of match was made, as well as the address elements that were changed to match the input address to the returned output address. See Appendix F: Match Codes and Location Codes. An approach to geocoding a table that achieves the desired geocoding results. For example, if geocoding hit rate is more important than accuracy, then less restrictive match criteria, such as Relaxed mode, would ensure that more records in the table are geocoded. However this strategy may produce false positive results. If you required greater accuracy, you could use stricter geocoding criteria, such as an exact match on street name and house number. must match PMB Must Match options are used for deciding whether returned candidates are close matches. A Must Match option does not eliminate non-close matches. Private Mailbox MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 21

22 Geocoding with MapMarker Geocoding Terminology (Continued) postal geocoding postcode Term Definition Candidate coordinates are based on postal codes. This is faster but not as accurate as street level geocoding. Also, postal geocoding of rural areas is generally less accurate than that of urban areas. For P.O. Box and rural route addresses, MapMarker automatically geocodes to a ZIP Code centroid, as required by CASS standards. A unique identifier for postal mailing zones. For the U.S.A. this is the ZIP Code system. See ZIP Code on page 23. post-directional The letters following a street name that give a direction to the address, for example 18th Street N. This shows that the location is on the north side of 18th street. Not every address has a post-directional component. post-type Street type that follows the street name. These are also known as street suffixes. For example, Main St. See Publication 28, Postal Addressing Standards Appendix C for a complete list of street suffix abbreviations recognized by the USPS and MapMarker. Not every address has a post-type component. pre-directional The letters preceding a street name that give a direction to the address, for example W 18th Street. This shows that the location is on the west side of 18th street. Not every address has a pre-directional component. result code street level geocoding MapMarker returns a result code (georesult) for each record it attempts to match. These codes allow you to determine the success and precision of the geocoding match. Result codes begin with either an S (street level geocode), Z (postal level geocode) or G (geographic level geocode. Result codes are described in more detail in Chapter 5 Result Codes. Candidate coordinates are interpolated along a street segment. This is a highly accurate level of geocoding. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 22

23 Geocoding with MapMarker Geocoding Terminology (Continued) Term Suite Link user dictionary ZIP Code Definition Suite Link is the USPS business name database that provides suite numbers for businesses located in high-rise buildings. This allows delivery sequencing where it would not otherwise be available. A customized search dictionary of addresses and coordinates that can be used in place of, or in addition to, the application s address dictionary. The system of numeric codes that identifies the individual post office or metropolitan area delivery station associated with an address. Understanding the Geocoding Process MapMarker is based on a model of relative matching that is governed by a set of weights that scores each portion of the address against candidate records (possible matches) in the Address Dictionary. The resulting scores are summed and the candidate s total score is used to determine the best match or matches. An exact match is made when a candidate scores well above other candidates. If there is no clear best match, several (non-close) candidates may be returned. If a record is not geocoded, you can still attempt to match that record during interactive geocoding where you can pick what you consider the best match from a list of candidates. The basic MapMarker workflow is to open your MapInfo Table or other input file, specify which columns contain address information, and then geocode your records. MapMarker automatically matches your records to those in its Address Dictionary, determines if there is a match, and assigns the geographic coordinates. Subsequent topics in this chapter provide more detail. Supported File Formats on page 24 Geocoding Flexibility and Trade-offs on page 24 General Guidelines for Optimizing Geocoding on page 25 Specify Input Address Columns on page 26 Specify Output Address Columns on page 26 Interpreting Census Block IDs on page 29 Output Field Size and Column Names on page 32 Mixed Case Street Output on page 33 Setting Startup Preferences on page 34 MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 23

24 Geocoding with MapMarker Supported File Formats MapMarker supports (opens and writes) files in the following data formats: TAB MapInfo TAB files DBF dbase format CSV comma-delimited text files (Desktop only) TXT other delimited text file (Desktop only) Delimited text files can use various delimiters (comma, semicolon, tab, slash, or other). If you open a CSV file, a comma delimiter is assumed. Note: MapMarker USA 29 can export TAB, DBF, CSV, and TXT files to ESRI Shapefile (SHP) format. Shapefile export is described in Exporting to Shapefiles on page 41. See Opening a Table or Text File on page 36 for instructions on opening an input file in MapMarker. See Defining Properties of Delimited Text Files on page 37 for information on managing delimited text files. See the following topics: Geocoding Flexibility and Trade-offs General Guidelines for Optimizing Geocoding Specify Input Address Columns Specify Output Address Columns Output Column Type/Width Requirements Interpreting Census Block IDs Output Field Size and Column Names Mixed Case Street Output Setting Startup Preferences Geocoding Flexibility and Trade-offs MapMarker uses a relative matching system that gives you a great deal of control over geocoding accuracy and scope. The optimal level of geocoding depends on your application and goals. You may require highly accurate address matching, or possibly a close positional matching is suitable for your purposes. Or you may want to retrieve as many records as possible in an area (postal code) without concern for exact address matching. There are trade-offs that you must consider with respect to how you intend to use the geocoded data. When setting up a geocoding session, consider questions such as the following: What level of matching accuracy are you looking for: a unique address match or close match? What level of geographic accuracy do you need for your geocoded points: street-level centroid or postal code centroid? Is your goal to geocode as many records as possible? MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 24

25 Geocoding with MapMarker The answers to these questions are driven by how you intend to use the geocoded records. When determining the location of a new retail store, you need to know the distribution of current and potential customers. In this case, you would need to geocode as much of the customer base as possible but you might not need an exact street address match for each customer. Geocoding to postal code centroid would be suitable for this analysis. Street level geocoding with strict matching preferences would be useful for cases in which it is necessary to know exactly where your customers are. For example, if you are a utility service coordinator and need to know exactly where your customers are in relation to neighborhood gas lines, the positional accuracy of each customer is of critical importance to you. In addition, the matching routine uses the geocoding preferences that are set for the table to determine whether certain matching conditions are required or not. For example, the MapMarker default preferences do not require a match on street name and ZIP Code, but require an exact match on the house number. This generally gives the best combination of hit rate with the fewest erroneous matches (false positives) and the best performance. For an overview of geocoding match strategies, see Choosing Match Strategies. General Guidelines for Optimizing Geocoding MapMarker USA 29 has been optimized for high performance. Follow these guidelines to achieve even faster performance. In general, you will achieve faster and more accurate geocoding if you standardize and format your data. By reducing the ambiguity in the input data, MapMarker USA 29 will be able to find appropriate candidates faster. For complete information on addressing practices and conventions and ZIP Codes, see the ZIP Code Lookup page on the USPS web site. Also consider the following guidelines to optimize your results and performance. Use the fastest processor available to you. Pitney Bowes recommends 2.5 Ghz dual processor or better. Have enough memory so that the operating system can allocate some memory to your disk cache. Pitney Bowes recommends 2 GB RAM or better. Have at least 10 GB available disk space. Store the Address Dictionary on a local hard drive. Sort your table by postal code before geocoding. Use Must Match (exact match) criteria for the most precise geocoding results. However, note that this strategy requires more processing and may reduce performance. Do not create points automatically. Remove indexes on any table output columns before geocoding. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 25

26 Geocoding with MapMarker Specify Input Address Columns MapMarker reads the addresses stored in your table and matches it against address records in the Address Dictionary. MapMarker then assigns geographic coordinates (geocodes) each address that it can process. You must specify the columns that contain your addresses. The Select Input Columns dialog is the first area where you specify that information. For street level geocoding, you must have at least one street address column plus one column each for city and state or ZIP Code. For ZIP Code centroid matching, you do not need to specify a street address or city and state. MapMarker can also geocode single line addresses, where all address components appear on a single line rather than in separate fields. That strategy is described in Using Single Line Addresses in Geocoding on page 55. For instructions on selecting input columns, see Selecting Input Columns on page 43. See also the following topics: Supported File Formats Geocoding Flexibility and Trade-offs General Guidelines for Optimizing Geocoding Specify Output Address Columns Output Column Type/Width Requirements Interpreting Census Block IDs Output Field Size and Column Names Mixed Case Street Output Setting Startup Preferences Specify Output Address Columns MapMarker can store longitude/latitude coordinates and geocoding result codes in your table. For supported output file formats, you can either prepare the table ahead of time by adding columns to store this information, or specify that MapMarker automatically creates the columns for you. For ODBC (remote) tables, you or your database administrator must add the columns before you run MapMarker. Note: The longitude/latitude columns are required if you do not want MapMarker to create points automatically. A result code column is optional, but it is recommended. If you want MapMarker to return the matching address for you to compare with your input address, you must provide columns for that information. For supported file formats, you can either prepare your table ahead of time, or create the columns by clicking Modify Columns on the Select input columns from your table or Select output columns from your table dialogs. For remote tables, add the columns before opening the file in MapMarker. If you store your input addresses in two fields, note that MapMarker only returns the matching address to a single field. ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 are returned to two fields. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 26

27 Geocoding with MapMarker MapMarker can also return attributes (such as demographic data) from other tables during geocoding, so you must first prepare columns from the Select Input Columns dialog as described in Specify Input Address Columns on page 26. For instructions on selecting output columns, see Selecting Output Columns on page 45. See the following topics: Supported File Formats Geocoding Flexibility and Trade-offs General Guidelines for Optimizing Geocoding Specify Input Address Columns Output Column Type/Width Requirements Interpreting Census Block IDs Output Field Size and Column Names Mixed Case Street Output Setting Startup Preferences Output Column Type/Width Requirements The Output Column Width Requirements table lists the type and width requirements for output columns. The asterisked columns are optional. All other columns are required for generating a CASS report These are not required for geocoding to CASS standards, but only for generating the report. For more information on LACS Link and DPV output requirements, see the following topics. LACS Link Output Columns on page 113 DPV Output Columns on page 117 Output Column Width Requirements Output Column Type (Width) Result Code Match Code Location Code Long (X) Lat (Y) Firm Address Address2 char(13) char(4) char(4) Decimal (11,6) or Float Decimal (10,6) or Float char(30) char(64) char(64) MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 27

28 Geocoding with MapMarker Output Column Width Requirements (Continued) Output Column Type (Width) City * State * char(30) char(2) Output County char (40) ZIP Code ZIP + 4 Urb Census * Delivery Pt Check Dig LACS Carrier Route DefaultFlag PMB PMB range EWS flag RecordType County * DataSource Type * DPV ConfCode DPV Cmra DPV falsepos DPV FtNote1 DPV FtNote2 DPV FtNote3 DPV Vacant DPV NoStat char(5) char(4) char(30) char(15) char(2) char(1) char(1) char(4) char(1) char(4) char(8) char(1) char(1) char(40) char(2) or small int char(1) char(1) char(1) char(2) char(2) char(2) char(1) char(1) MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 28

29 Geocoding with MapMarker Output Column Width Requirements (Continued) Output Column Type (Width) LACSLink Indicator * LACSLink Code SuiteLink Code char(1) char(2) char(1) See the following topics: Supported File Formats Geocoding Flexibility and Trade-offs General Guidelines for Optimizing Geocoding Specify Input Address Columns Specify Output Address Columns Interpreting Census Block IDs Output Field Size and Column Names Mixed Case Street Output Setting Startup Preferences Interpreting Census Block IDs MapMarker can return Census Block IDs as output, or partial Census information, depending on the quality of the match. The complete Census Block ID is a 15-character code and is made up of the following: SSCCCTTTTTTGBB(B) where S=State FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standard) code (two characters) C=County FIPS code (three characters) T=Census Tract (six characters) G=Census Block Group (one character) B=Census Block (typically two characters, sometimes three) MapMarker can return the full 15-character Census Block ID for geocoded records with S2, S3, S5, S7, or S8 geocoding result codes The S4 result code can return a 15-character Census Block ID if the block groups on each side of the street are the same. Note: Result codes are very important in evaluating the accuracy of your geocoded results. For a more complete discussion of this topic, see Result Codes. Some S codes and Z codes may return partial census information if ZIP + 4 information is supplied. Others may not return any census information because certain information is missing. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 29

30 Geocoding with MapMarker The following table shows what census information is returned, if any, for specific geocoding result codes. Geocoding Result Codes Related to Census Block Information Result Code Census Block ID Output S8 S7 S6 S5 S8 results are matched to either the single point associated with an address point candidate, or to an address point candidate that shares the same house number. An S8 result is possible only if you are using a point dictionary. The S8 indicates that the address candidate corresponds to an exact point. No interpolation is required. S8 results can return complete 15-character Census Block ID. S7 results are matched to an interpolated point along a street segment. An S7 result is possible only if you are using a point dictionary in addition to a street segment dictionary. Since the S7 interpolation is based on known point addresses, the interpolation is more accurate than interpolation based on a segment dictionary alone (which would produce an S5 result). S7 results can return a complete 15-character Census Block ID. You must enable address point interpolation to generate S7 result codes. See Dictionary Preferences and check the Use Address Point Interpolation check box to enable address point interpolation during geocoding. S6 results are matched to a point ZIP centroid. A point ZIP is a 5-digit ZIP Code that represents a unique ZIP such as a single site, building, or organization. S6 is the same level of geocoding accuracy as a Z6 result. S5 results are matched to an interpolated point along a street segment. An S5 result is based on a street segment dictionary only. This interpolation is not a accurate as an S7 result. When using the Address Dictionary, this can return a complete 15-character Census Block ID. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 30

31 Geocoding with MapMarker Geocoding Result Codes Related to Census Block Information Result Code Census Block ID Output S4 S3 S2 S1 SX SC Z6 Z3 S4 results are matched to a street centroid point. S4 results can return complete 15-character Census Block ID, but only if the block groups on each side of the street are the same. A house number is also required for Census Block IDs. S3 results are matched to ZIP + 4 locations. S3 is the same level of geocoding accuracy as a Z3 result. S3 results can return complete 15-character Census Block ID if the ZIP + 4 location is contained in one Census Block. However a ZIP + 4 location may cover more than one Census Block, in which case S3 may return a 12-character Census Block Group number. S2 results are matched to ZIP + 2 locations. This may return partial census information if ZIP + 4 is supplied. S2 is the same level of geocoding accuracy as a Z2 result. S1 results are matched to ZIP centroid locations. This may return partial census information if ZIP + 4 is supplied. S1 is the same level of geocoding accuracy as a Z1 result. SX results are matched to a point located at street intersection. SC results represent a match where the original point has been moved a specified distance (usually along a perpendicular line) toward or away from the associated street segment. An SC result is possible only when both a point dictionary and a street segment dictionary are available and when you are using the centerline offset feature. Z6 results are matched to a point ZIP centroid. Point ZIPs are 5-digit The Z6 code indicates that these special ZIPs are actual point locations, not an area. Point ZIPs include unique single sites, buildings, or organizations. May return partial census information if ZIP + 4 is supplied. Z3 results are matched to ZIP + 4 locations. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 31

32 Geocoding with MapMarker Geocoding Result Codes Related to Census Block Information Result Code Census Block ID Output Z2 Z1 May return partial census information if ZIP + 4 is supplied. Z2 results are matched to ZIP + 2 locations. May return partial census information if ZIP + 4 is supplied. Z1 results are matched to ZIP centroid locations. For more information on result codes, see Result Codes. See the following topics: Supported File Formats Geocoding Flexibility and Trade-offs General Guidelines for Optimizing Geocoding Specify Input Address Columns Specify Output Address Columns Output Column Type/Width Requirements Output Field Size and Column Names Mixed Case Street Output Setting Startup Preferences Output Field Size and Column Names MapMarker can return output information (such as firm names, apartment numbers, and suites) that exceeds the recommended width of the output fields for Street and Firm. When this happens, MapMarker truncates the information in the respective output field. In the Input Column and Output Column dialogs, if a field name is too long to be seen in its entirety in the list box, hold the cursor over the field name to display a popup box with the full name of the field. See the following topics: Supported File Formats Geocoding Flexibility and Trade-offs General Guidelines for Optimizing Geocoding Specify Input Address Columns Specify Output Address Columns Output Column Type/Width Requirements Interpreting Census Block IDs Mixed Case Street Output Setting Startup Preferences MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 32

33 Geocoding with MapMarker Mixed Case Street Output This optional feature adds the ability for output street addresses to have mixed case. The capability is supplied in the MapMarker Desktop Application only. This geocoding preference located on the Geocode tab of the Geocode dialog. When the Mixed Letter Case check box is selected, the output street is in mixed case for a match. The input street column remains unchanged. See Geocoding Your Table Automatically on page 48 for a description of the Geocode dialog. An output address without a house number remains in uppercase. This is to accommodate cases such as PO BOX 233. Streets such as McFly are handled so that the letter following Mc is capitalized. However, a word like MacIntosh is not handled because it cannot be differentiated from a word like Macoun. See the following topics: Supported File Formats Geocoding Flexibility and Trade-offs General Guidelines for Optimizing Geocoding Specify Input Address Columns Specify Output Address Columns Output Column Type/Width Requirements Interpreting Census Block IDs Output Field Size and Column Names Setting Startup Preferences MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 33

34 Geocoding with MapMarker Setting Startup Preferences MapMarker has Startup preferences that apply to all of your geocoding sessions. This allows you to start MapMarker with a consistent appearance and behavior. These Startup preferences are available on the System Preferences dialog. To display the System Preferences dialog, click System Preferences on the Options menu, and then click the Startup tab. You can use any and all preferences available in this dialog. For the file open choices, if you select either Show for MapInfo or dbase files or Show for ODBC tables, the Open dialog appears automatically when you start MapMarker. If you have both options selected, MapMarker prompts you with another dialog at startup to choose which type of table you want to open. You may also control which of the setup dialogs, if any, display on startup. Choose from: Show Select Column Dialog On Open (selected by default) Select Attribute Files After Selecting Columns Show Geocode Dialog After Selecting Columns (selected by default) By selecting all three options, when you start MapMarker, it walks you through the geocode and attribution setup phase. The settings are saved to the table as metadata and used as new defaults when you open the table again. Other system preferences are discussed in Setting System Preferences on page 83. See the following topics: Supported File Formats Geocoding Flexibility and Trade-offs General Guidelines for Optimizing Geocoding Specify Input Address Columns Specify Output Address Columns Output Column Type/Width Requirements MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 34

35 Geocoding with MapMarker Interpreting Census Block IDs Output Field Size and Column Names Mixed Case Street Output Setting Startup Preferences Running MapMarker Overview MapMarker geocodes your records to street level, ZIP Code, or geographic centroid either automatically (making a match without user interaction) or interactively (allowing you to decide the match from a list of suggestions). You can use a number of strategies to geocode your records. A basic scenario is to run MapMarker and follow these steps: 1. Open the table to be geocoded and identify the columns that contain specific address components (see Selecting Input and Output Address Columns on page Geocode your records automatically to match as many records as possible. See Geocoding Your Table Automatically on page Geocode remaining unmatched records interactively by choosing from a list of candidates. See Geocoding Your Table Interactively on page Display geocoded records in Pitney Bowes mapping software. See Displaying Geocoded Records in MapInfo Professional on page Analyze the result codes. See Result Codes. After opening an input table, you must identify the input columns that contain address information to use for matching purposes. Opening and Running a Project A project preserves settings preferences and restores these settings the next time the project is opened. A project file overrides any existing metadata settings associated with a TAB file. To create or save a project, see Creating and Saving a Project on page 77. That topic also describes the specific items that are saved with a project. To open an existing project: 1. From the MapMarker menu, select File > Projects > Open Project. 2. Navigate to the folder that contains the project, select the project name (with a PROJ file extension), and click Open. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 35

36 Geocoding with MapMarker Note: You can open only one project at a time. After opening the project you can geocode using the column mappings and geocoding preferences that were saved with the project. Or you can you make changes before proceeding with geocoding. If you are using an old project, you may get an initialization error when you try to run the project in MapMarker USA 29. This is because your project is pointing to an older Address Dictionary. You can ignore this error message, and the project will then use the MapMarker USA 29 Address Dictionary. To eliminate this error message, see the Note on page 78 with Creating and Saving a Project. Running a Project from a Batch File You can run a project from a command line batch file. For this syntax see Creating a Project-Based Batch File on page 78. Opening a Table or Text File The following steps describe how to select and open your input file. See Supported File Formats on page 24. Note: This procedure applies to opening local files. For instructions on opening remote tables, see Geocoding Remote Tables.. 3. Start MapMarker from the Windows Start menu or Shortcut menu. 4. Select File > Open Table, click or click the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu. The Open Table dialog appears. Select the folder that contains your tables and click Open. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 36

37 Geocoding with MapMarker 5. From the Files of type drop-down list, select one of the following file types: MapInfo Tables (*.TAB) DBF Files (*.DBF) Comma-delimited text (*.CSV) Other delimited files All files associated with the selected file type will appear. See Supported File Formats on page 24 for a description of MapMarker supported input file formats. 6. Select the file that you want and click Open. If you open a MapInfo TAB file, you will now identify address input and output columns. Continue with Selecting Input and Output Address Columns on page 43 If you open a text file (CSV, TXT, or possibly other file extension), the Text File Wizard appears. Continue with Defining Properties of Delimited Text Files Note: After you open a TAB file, you can right-click anywhere in the workspace to see a context menu. This gives you an alternative way to perform the same actions that are available from menu selections. Defining Properties of Delimited Text Files After you open any CSV or TXT input file, the Text File Wizard appears. This wizard allows you to define the properties of the input file. Note: The wizard creates or modifies format files that govern the properties of its associated input and output text file. The format files are created in the same folder that contains the input file. If this folder is not writable, the format files are created in My Documents\MapMarker USA\ folder. Format file are given the same name as the associated text file, but with an FMT file extension. In most cases you will not have to examine or maintain the format files in any way, but you can examine then using any text editor. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 37

38 Geocoding with MapMarker The following steps follow one likely scenario and show how to use the Text File Wizard for a comma-delimited text file This example assumes that you are opening the file for the first time and the first row of the table is used for column titles (rather than data). First, open the text file as described in Opening a Table or Text File on page 36. Select TXT file extension from the Files of type drop-down. 1. Step 1 of the Text File Wizard displays the Input Table dialog with the name of the file that was previously opened. The list box area of the dialog will display up to the first 20 records of the opened file. Text File Type: If the text file is a delimited file, the appropriate button will be selected in the wizard. Delimiter Type: If the delimiter is recognized it will be selected and the other choices are disabled. For example, with a CSV file a comma delimiter is recognized and the other group selections are disabled. Semicolon, tab, or slash can also be used as delimiters. If one of these standard delimiters is not recognized in your text file, you can select Other and type the delimiter character. For example, your text file might use a pipe symbol ( ) as a delimiter. Not all characters and symbols can be used as delimiters. You will receive an appropriate message if you try to specify a disallowed character. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 38

39 Geocoding with MapMarker First Line Used for Column Titles: You can use the first line of the text file as column titles or as data. To use the first line as column titles, check the First Line Used for Column Titles check box. This will replace the generic FIELD_1, FIELD_2... labels and use the first row of the text file to name the columns. If First Line Used for Column Titles is not checked, the first line will be used as data just as any other line in your text file. In this example, we will assume that the first line of the text file is used for column titles. When you have finished with step 1of the wizard, click Next to go to step 2 of the wizard. 2. Step 2 of the text file wizard allows you to examine the fields (columns) in the input table and change the field name. Click a field name to see all the relevant information for that field. You can also change the name of fields. Some fields cannot be changed, depending on they type of file that you opened. For example, you could change the name of a field from City to Municipality. Click Next to update your changes to go to step 3 of the wizard. 3. Step 3 of the text file wizard allows you to select the output file. This file contains the output columns in which MapMarker will store the address components, result codes, and coordinate information for each matched record after you geocode. Typically, the output file uses the same base name as the input file with _out appended to the file name. This prevents you from accidentally overwriting the data in the original input file. Click OK. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 39

40 Geocoding with MapMarker By default, the output file is created the same folder that contains the input file. If this folder is not writable, the output file is created in the My Documents\MapMarker USA\ folder. If the output file already exists, you can choose to overwrite or change the file name. 4. Click OK. 5. Select the input columns from your table. See Selecting Input Columns on page Select output columns. Standard address column names will be named with the OUT_ prefix (for example, OUT_STATE and OUT_ZIPCODE) and these column names will be pre-populated in output column selections. See Selecting Output Columns on page 45. Delimited File Guidelines The Text File Wizard helps you manage how delimited files are interpreted and used in MapMarker. The following guidelines may help you when using the Text File Wizard. If you want to ignore the first row in the text file (that is, not use it for either column title or data), you should remove the row from the data file. When you geocode, you can specify which rows to geocode, so you can select or skip row 1. See step 3 of Geocoding Your Table Automatically for an example of selecting a range of rows to geocode. Delimited text files can be geocoded automatically or interactively. See Geocoding Your Table Automatically on page 48 and Geocoding Your Table Interactively on page 49. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 40

41 Geocoding with MapMarker Exporting to Shapefiles MapMarker USA 29 can export TAB, DBF, CSV, and TXT files to ESRI Shapefile (SHP) format. For example, a MapMarker USA 29 can open any of the following file types for Shapefile export: MapInfo Table (TAB) Delimited text (CSV, TXT) DBF Note: There are some limitations on how attributes of the original files are preserved and exported to SHP files: For DBF files, binary, memo, and OLE data types are not supported and are not exported to the SHP file. For CSV files, numbers are exported as strings. For TAB files, date and time fields are exported as strings, and decimal numbers are truncated to six places of precision. The following steps describe how to select, open, and export your input file. 1. Start MapMarker from the Windows Start menu or Shortcut menu. 2. Open a Table or text file. Follow the steps in Opening a Table or Text File on page From the Table menu, select Export to ESRI Shapefile. 4. In the Export To dialog, select a file name for export. The SHP file extension is automatically selected for ESRI Shapefiles. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 41

42 Geocoding with MapMarker MapMarker checks for write permission on the directory that you are exporting the Shapefile to. If write permission is verified, the process continues. You will receive a message if you do not select a valid file name, or if the directory does not have write permission, or the Shapefile already exists. MapMarker also checks whether the opened file is a DBF file. If the input is a DBF file, the export file name will be named with a _out suffix. For example, if the input file was Customer.dbf the export file name will be Customer_out.shp. After specifying the SHP file name, click Save. 5. In the Export to ESRI Shapefile dialog, do one of the following: a. If the table in not mappable or does not contain points, Use X/Y Columns will be selected. For TAB files, Long (X) and Lat (Y) are initially populated with the appropriate column names as determined from table metadata. If the TAB file metadata does not contain this information, MapMarker will look for typical names for coordinate columns and populate those column names into the Long (X) and Lat (Y) fields. If no typical names are found (or if you want to change the Long (X) and Lat (Y) column names), you can select columns from the drop-down lists. CSV, TXT, or DBF files do not contain metadata. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 42

43 Geocoding with MapMarker b. Alternatively, if the table is mappable and there are points in the table the Use Point Geometry will be initially checked. If the table is not mappable, the Use Point Geometry choice will be disabled (grayed out). 6. Click Export. If you selected Use X/Y Columns, MapMarker verifies the type of the selected Long/Lat columns. The acceptable types are decimal, float, and string. If the opened table is a DBF file, or the user doesn t have write permission, the Export To dialog re-appears. This dialog is described in step A progress bar appears and a confirmation message indicates the success of the Export. Note: See the Note at the beginning of this section to understand limitations on date/time and other data that is exported to SHP files. Selecting Input and Output Address Columns After opening your input file, you are ready to identify the address input address columns and output address columns. These are the columns that contain address information to use for the purposes of geocoding matching. See the following topics: Selecting Input Columns on page 43 Selecting Output Columns on page 45 Selecting Input Columns For MapMarker USA, the key input address columns are: MapMarker U.S.A. Input Address Columns Input Address Example Firm Address Pitney Bowes One Global View MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 43

44 Geocoding with MapMarker MapMarker U.S.A. Input Address Columns(Continued) Input Address Example Address2 (optional secondary address line) City State Suite 175 Troy NY ZIP Code ZIP Urb (Urbanization) Parc Sabana (used for Puerto Rico addresses only). The following steps describe how to identify the address input columns in your input file. After identifying the input columns, you can begin geocoding, either interactively or automatically. 1. Choose the table you wish to geocode. Click Open. 2. Click OK. A progress bar appears as your table is being updated. Then a browser window appears, displaying the Table. You will see a dialog box titled: Select input columns from your table. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 44

45 Geocoding with MapMarker 3. Select the input columns that contain the appropriate address components. If your table has separate columns for ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 information, identify each column in the ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 boxes. MapMarker attempts to choose the address columns for you. It can make some determinations for fields, but if this is the first time this table has been opened in MapMarker, be sure to verify these columns. Once you have geocoded the table, the column settings are saved to the table as metadata and used for future geocoding sessions. Single line address input is recognized in the Address field. See Using Single Line Addresses in Geocoding on page 55 for details on geocoding single line addresses. County Level Geocoding Use the County input field only if you want to explicitly geocode to the county centroid. You may need to add the County column to your input table. (Click Modify/Add Columns and see Adding a Column on page 47. For county centroid geocoding, you should also use the State input field because identically named counties are found in several states. 4. When you are finished selecting input columns, click Next. You are now ready to select output columns. See Selecting Output Columns. Selecting Output Columns After you have selected input columns, you will see a dialog box titled: Select output columns from your table. 1. Select columns in your output table where you want MapMarker to store the address components, result codes, and coordinate information for each matched record. From the list of at the left, drag column names to the appropriate output address column. Use <Clear> selection to clear a column selection. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 45

46 Geocoding with MapMarker To avoid overwriting your input data, use output columns that have different names than the corresponding input columns. If your output columns and input columns have the same name, you receive a Warning message when you click Finish in step 3. If you click Yes, you will overwrite your input data. Click No to change your output column selections. 2. In the Select output columns from your table dialog box, continue with the following steps, as necessary. a. If you do not want MapMarker to create points for your table, clear the check box marked Create points in MapInfo table. In that case, you must select longitude and latitude columns to proceed with geocoding. (Create points is not available if you are geocoding a text file rather than a TAB file.) b. If you are using CASS and want to generate a CASS report, all output fields with the exception of asterisked fields are required. Note that this is not required for geocoding with CASS, but only for generating a CASS report. c. Identify a Census output column if you want MapMarker to return the Census Block code for the matched address. MapMarker returns the code that represents the state and county FIPS code, census tract, and tabulation block, depending on the match type. d. You can optionally identify a County output column if you want MapMarker to return the name of the county. You may need to add the County column to your output table. e. If you are using DPV, LACS Link, or Suite Link, select Show DPV, LACSLink, SuiteLink Columns. Note that the these columns are required for generating the CASS report (but not required for CASS address matching). MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 46

47 Geocoding with MapMarker 3. Once you have provided all the information in the Select output columns from your table, click Finish. You are then returned to the Geocode dialog box. If your output columns and input columns have the same name, you will receive a Warning message when you click Finish. To avoid overwriting your input data, click No at the Warning message, and specify output columns that have different names than the corresponding input columns. If you need to add a uniquely named output column, click Modify /Add and follow the instructions in Adding a Column on page 47. After selecting the input and output columns, you can begin geocoding, either interactively or automatically. See the following topics: Geocoding Your Table Automatically on page 48 Geocoding Your Table Interactively on page 49 Adding a Column 1. You may need to add a column to either your input or output table. For example, you may want to add a uniquely named column to an output table so that you do not overwrite your input data during geocoding. 2. Click Modify/Add Columns to access the Modify Table Structure dialog. 3. Click Add Column to add a new column to the table. The Columns list box displays a new default 10-character column named Field# (where # is the column number in the table). 4. In the Column Information group, define the Name, Type, and Width of the new column containing the new attributes. If you are adding a new output column, this column should have a unique name but have the same type and width as the corresponding input column. For example, if the input table Firm column is defined as type Character with a width of 10, you could define and Output_Firm column with the same type and width parameters. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 47

48 Geocoding with MapMarker 5. Click OK when done editing the new column information. 6. A message appears telling you that the table must be closed and re-opened for update. Click Yes to continue. Geocoding Your Table Automatically To geocode automatically: 1. If the Geocode dialog is not automatically displayed upon leaving the Select Output dialog, do one of the following: Select Table > Geocode from the MapMarker menu. Click. Click the right mouse button, and select Geocode from the pop-up menu. 2. In the Geocode Precision group, select Street Level and select Automatic from the Method drop-down list. Alternatively, you could geocode to ZIP Centroid or Geographic Centroid. 3. Select the Range to Geocode and Row Numbers to geocode. By default, MapMarker automatically geocodes the unmatched rows. For previously geocoded tables, you may be able to improve matching by re-geocoding records that had a georesult below a specified level. 4. Set additional geocoding preferences by selecting the appropriate tabs and check boxes. For an explanation of these preferences, see Using Geocoding Options on page 62. In particular, see Match Settings Dialog on page 66 to apply a range of highly restrictive or less restrictive match criteria, and Fallback Dialog on page 75 to permit a less precise geocoding match if the original criteria do not produce a match. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 48

49 Geocoding with MapMarker 5. Click Geocode to begin geocoding. The Automatic Geocode dialog appears showing a progress bar that updates the match count every 25 records. 6. At the completion of the geocoding run, click Done to leave the Automatic Geocode summary dialog. MapMarker opens the log file if you selected Automatically open log file after geocoding in the Log File dialog. The log file contains a history of the geocoding pass, including the number of matched, unmatched and previously matched records, and the number of matched records by result code. Information from subsequent passes is appended to the top of the log file. The log file size limit is 1 MB. 7. To create a summary of the geocoding results for a table, select Table > Table Summary. Specify the column containing the georesult and save the information as a text file. The summary is for the active table (the frontmost browser). If you run multiple tables in a single session, you will have addresses open for each table. To obtain the geocoding summary information for the desired table, select the appropriate table to make it active and select View > Summary. To view information about previous geocoding passes, view the log file by selecting View > Log file. See the following topics: Automatic Geocode dialog on page 187 Making the Most of Interactive Geocoding on page 52 Interactive Geocode dialog on page 203 Quick Geocode command on page 181 Geocoding Your Table Interactively MapMarker allows you to geocode records interactively by choosing from a list of candidates. Using interactive geocoding, you can expand the search for a match, map potential matches, move back up the table to an earlier record, and correct your records directly from the MapMarker dialog. Note: Interactive geocoding is not completely interactive. MapMarker attempts to geocode the row first. Only when it fails to find a single close match is the record displayed in the Interactive dialog. 1. Do one of the following: Select Table > Geocode from the MapMarker menu. Click. Click the right mouse button, and select Geocode from the pop-up menu. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 49

50 Geocoding with MapMarker 2. In the Geocode Precision group, select Street Level and select Interactive from the Method drop-down list. 3. Select the range and type of rows to geocode. 4. Click Geocode. The Interactive Geocode dialog appears and shows the first unmatched record and a list of suggested matches. The candidate list displays each potential match including a result code, Match Codes and Location codes, street address, LastLine of address, and other information. A green check mark in the Cand Num column indicates a close match. Use the horizontal scroll bar to see additional columns, including the coordinates and the DataSource Name (the name of address or user dictionary that returned the candidate.) You can also right-click a candidate to a candidate and select Show Status Code Details. This displays the Status Codes dialog with tabs for GeoResult Code, Match Code, and Locational Code. Note: The candidate list columns are the same as you will see in the Quick Find dialog. See Match Candidate List on page 131 for a more detailed description of these columns. 5. Select Geocode if you agree that the highlighted suggested match is the correct match. MapMarker assigns coordinates from that row and moves on to display the next unmatched record. To choose a different candidate in the list, move the highlight with your cursor to your choice and select Geocode. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 50

51 Geocoding with MapMarker 6. Select Next if MapMarker offers no match suggestions or if you do not agree with the choices in the match list. When you click Next, a dialog is displayed asking if you want to mark the record as Non-geocodable. This means that you do not want MapMarker to attempt to match this record during future geocoding passes. This is useful when you know the record does not geocode and you do not want it to display again in future geocoding passes. You have several choices in this dialog: Click Yes to have MapMarker mark the record with the result code NG (nongeocodable). This dialog is displayed each time you click Next. Click Yes to All if you want to mark all future Ignore records in this geocoding session as NG. The dialog is not displayed again during the session. Click No if you do not wish to mark the record as NG. The dialog is displayed each time you click Next on a record. Click No to All if you do not want to mark any Ignore records as NG. The dialog is not displayed again during the session. 7. To expand the search area, check Expand Search and specify a radius up to 99 miles. Select the check box labelled Limit to current state if desired. This feature helps to find a match when the input address contains limited or inaccurate city or ZIP Code information. 8. To change the interactive matching conditions, click Options. The tabs, Match Settings, Fallback, and Multiple Match appear. Make the necessary changes to increase the potential for a match. For more information on controlling these geocoding match settings and preferences, see: Match Settings Dialog on page 66 Fallback Dialog on page 75 Multiple Match Dialog on page Click Search to search the Address Dictionary using the new matching conditions. 10.Edit the record by entering new text that may increase the likelihood of a match. Click Search to bring up a new list of suggestions that may better match the edited record. Add the edits into your table by selecting the Write selected address below to database on Geocode check box. Choose the match from the list and click Geocode. MapMarker geocodes the record and updates your table with your edits. 11.To see an expanded list of ranges, including apartment numbers, office suites, etc., select Ranges. A detailed list of address ranges for the highlighted street appears. Click Ranges again to close the list of ranges. 12.Click Back to move backward in the table to re-display a record. 13.Click Map to view the match candidates in a map window. The match candidates are displayed with color-coded symbols that indicate their match potential to the input MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 51

52 Geocoding with MapMarker address. See Displaying Geocoded Records in MapInfo Professional on page 60 for a description of the symbols. The map feature is available if you have set the location for street data in the Maps tab in the System Preferences dialog, as described in Maps System Preferences. Also see Viewing Match Candidates on a Map, for related information. Click Close. A Geocoding Summary is displayed showing the results of the session 14.Click Done. To view the summary again, select View > Summary. 15.To create a summary of the geocoding results for a table, select Table > Table Summary. Specify the column containing the georesult and save the information as a text file. See the following topics: Automatic Geocode dialog on page 187 Geocoding Your Table Automatically on page 48 Interactive Geocode dialog on page 203 Quick Geocode command on page 181 Making the Most of Interactive Geocoding Interactive geocoding allows you to control the matching process because you can accept or ignore a potential match from the list of suggestions that MapMarker generates for the record. See the following topics: Change Matching Conditions on page 53 Map the Match Candidates on page 53 Edit Your Records on page 53 MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 52

53 Geocoding with MapMarker Change Matching Conditions MapMarker follows the settings in the Geocode dialog or responds to your changed settings as you progress through the interactive pass. To increase the list of suggested matches, you can use less restrictive matching criteria. You can do this at the beginning of an interactive pass or change the settings for each record by clicking Options on the Interactive Geocode dialog.. You can also return to a previous record in the table by selecting Back and changing settings as needed. This feature can help you maximize the potential for a match. Map the Match Candidates To help you choose the best match for your record, display the candidates on a map via Map in the Interactive dialog. This requires that you have street data on your system and you specify its location in the System Preferences > Maps tab. See Viewing Match Candidates on a Map for a complete discussion of visualizing match candidates. Edit Your Records Interactive geocoding also allows you to correct your record to improve the possibility of a match. If you choose, your table can be updated to reflect the newly edited record, all from within the Interactive Geocode dialog. By manually correcting the fields to put the firm, street, city, and state into their proper locations, the record is more logical and MapMarker can make better suggestions on possible matches. After editing the record, click Search to display a new list of match candidates. To write these changes to the base table, select the Write modified address above to Input Fields on Geocode check box and click Geocode to confirm the match. Note: Your edits overwrite the address data in the respective fields, so be sure not to alter the fields containing the correct address data. Remote Tables Note that when you geocode remote tables interactively, MapMarker cannot overwrite the Input Address fields of the source table. That is why the check box Write modified address above to Input Fields on Geocode is unavailable in the Interactive Geocode dialog. Intersection Geocoding MapMarker enables you to geocode to street intersections in two ways. The method that you choose depends on how you prefer to store the street and cross street information in your table. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 53

54 Geocoding with MapMarker Intersection addresses stored in one column. With this method of intersection geocoding, MapMarker reads input street addresses that contain intersection tokens (such as && ) between the street and the cross street. If you do not have the information in your table, you must create a column that contains the street and the cross street. Street 1 and Street 2 names can be separated by one of the following intersection tokens: and, at, &, &&. For example, to specify the intersection of Main Street and Washington Avenue, the column input address could look like: Main Street && Washington Avenue Main St & Washington Ave. Main St at Washington Ave Main St and Washington Ave You can omit spaces between the token and the street name, but the space is required for the and separator. To use this single-column method to geocode to street intersections, do the following: 1. Open the table you want to geocode. 2. In the Select input columns from your table dialog, specify the columns that have the appropriate address components. Map the column that contains the intersection information to the Address box. 3. Click Next. In the Select output columns from your table dialog, select the columns in which you want to store the output 4. Click Finish. 5. If the Geocode dialog does not display automatically, select Table > Geocode. 6. Click Geocode. Intersection addresses stored in separate columns. In this method of intersection geocoding, the street and cross street are stored in separate columns. An option in the Select input columns from your table dialog enables you to specify which column to use as the cross street. To use this method to geocode to street intersections, do the following: 7. Open the table you want to geocode. 8. In the Select input columns from your table dialog, specify the columns from your table that have the appropriate address components. Map the columns that have the street and cross street information to the Address and Address2 boxes. 9. Select the Use Address2 Column as Intersection Cross Street check box. 10.Click Next. In the Select output columns from your table dialog, select the columns to store the output. 11.Click Finish. 12.If the Geocode dialog does not display automatically select Table > Geocode. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 54

55 Geocoding with MapMarker 13.Click Geocode. For an example of intersection geocoding see Intersection Geocoding on page 53: Using Single Line Addresses in Geocoding MapMarker can geocode single line addresses, in which all address components appear on a single line rather than in separate fields. Each line of your single line input data must appear in the order: <street address> <city> <state> <ZIP> <country>. Not all of these address components are required. If you omit the ZIP Code and country, MapMarker still geocodes the address based on street address, city, and state. If you use delimiters (comma, semicolon, or colon) between each component of the address, MapMarker parses the address accordingly. For example, if your input was: One Global View, Troy, NY, The delimiters are recognized and the address is parsed as: Main Address City State One Global View Troy NY ZIP Code Country U,S.A. (default for MapMarker U,S.A.) If delimiters are missing in the input address, MapMarker recognizes spaces as separators and uses internal parsing rules to identify address components. In the example above, MapMarker would still successfully geocode the address even if some or all of the delimiters were missing in the input. However, non-delimited or partially delimited addresses may take longer to geocode. Punctuation (such as quotation marks) are ignored for geocoding purposes. See the following topics: Single Line Geocoding Capabilities and Guidelines on page 55 Examples of Single Line Addresses on page 56 Single Line Geocoding Capabilities and Guidelines MapMarker can recognize single line addresses that have the following characteristics: P.O. boxes MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 55

56 Geocoding with MapMarker Address units such as apartment or suite numbers Addresses with Private Mailbox (PMB) information Dual addresses (such as addresses containing both a P.O. Box and street) U.S military addresses Single line address geocoding works within the following guidelines: The country is not required for U.S.A. You must include either (City plus State) or ZIP Code as the last address element. For example, either Phoenix AZ or (an Arizona ZIP Code) would be sufficient. However, the City or State alone would not be sufficient. Specific delimiters (comma, semicolon, or colon) between each address component improve geocoding results. MapMarker can geocode space-delimited addresses, but it takes longer and may not be as accurate. Partially delimited addresses are acceptable. Your input table can have formatted addresses, single line addresses, or a combination of both. MapMarker recognizes the input formats and geocodes accordingly. Single line addresses are recognized in the Address field of the Select input columns table. See step 2 of Selecting Input Columns for a description of that dialog. You can still specify output columns. See step 1 of Selecting Output Columns for a description of that dialog. Single line input is supported in Quick Find geocoding. See Finding Candidates Using Quick Find. Whether you identify address input columns in your input file, or use single line style input addresses, you can geocode your data automatically or interactively. Geocoding Your Table Automatically on page 48 Geocoding Your Table Interactively on page 49 Examples of Single Line Addresses Following are examples of single line addresses that can be geocoded with a close match GRANT ST UNIT 140 # 8351 Mobile AL (unit type and number, no delimiters) 2901 GRANT ST UNIT 140 # 8351, Mobile, AL, (unit type and number, comma delimiters) 2901 GRANT ST UNIT 140 # 8351; Mobile; AL; (unit type and number, semicolon delimiters) P.O.Box Phoenix Arizona (P.O. Box, no delimiters) P.O.Box 33049, Phoenix, Arizona, (P.O. Box, comma delimiter) 1 Global St Troy New York (street type corrected from St. to Vw, no delimiters) 2901 GRANT ST UNIT 140 # 8351 Mobile AL (unit type and number, no delimiters, no ZIP Code) MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 56

57 Geocoding with MapMarker 2901 GRANT ST UNIT 140 # 8351, Mobile, AL (unit type and number, comma delimiters, no ZIP Code) P.O.Box Phoenix (P.O. Box, no delimiters, no State) P.O.Box 33049, Phoenix, (P.O. Box, comma delimiters no State) 2901 GRANT ST UNIT 140 # 8351, Mobile AL (unit type and number, no delimiters, no ZIP Code) 2901 GRANT ST UNIT 140 # 8351 Mobile, AL (unit type and number, partially delimited, no ZIP Code) Hwy 8 W P.O. Box 1070 Grenada MS (dual address: both P.O. Box and street) UNIT 2134 APO AP (military address) Using Address Range Geocoding Some business locations are identified by address ranges. For example, a shopping plaza could be addressed as Front St. This is how business mail would typically be addressed to such a business location. These address ranges can be geocoded to the interpolated mid-point of the range. Note: Address ranges are different than hyphenated (dashed) addresses that occur in some metropolitan areas. For example, a hyphenated address in Queens County (New York City) could be Ave. This represents a single residence (rather than an address range) and is geocoded as a single address. If a hyphenated address similar to this example is returned as a close match candidate, address range geocoding will not be attempted. Address ranges cannot be geocoded in CASS mode, since the range is not an actual USPS address. Also, the following fields are not returned by address range geocoding: ZIP + 4 (in multiple segment cases) Delivery Point Check Digit Carrier Route Record Type Multi-Unit Default flag See the following topics: Address Range Geocoding Capabilities and Guidelines on page 58 Examples of Address Ranges on page 58 MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 57

58 Geocoding with MapMarker Address Range Geocoding Capabilities and Guidelines Address Range geocoding works within the following guidelines: There must be two numbers separated by a hyphen. The first number must be lower than the second number. Both numbers must be of the same parity (odd or even) unless the address segment itself has mixed odd and even addresses. Numbers can be on the same street segment or can be on two different segments. The segments do not have to be contiguous. If both numbers are on the same street segment, the geocoded point is interpolated to the approximate mid-point of the range. If the numbers are on two different segments, the geocoded point is based on the last valid house number of the first segment. The ZIP Code and FIPS Code are based on the first segment. In all cases, odd/even parity is evaluated to place the point on the correct side of the street. Address range geocoding will not be attempted in the following cases: If a valid hyphenated address is recognized as a close match (similar to the Queens, NY address described in the preceding Note.) If removing the hyphen produces a close match. For example: an address like 1-5 Hoosick St, Troy, NY produces a valid address of 15 Hoosick St if the hyphen is removed. So 15 Hoosick St. is returned as a close match and address geocoding is not attempted. Examples of Address Ranges Following are examples of address ranges that can be successfully geocoded: Red Apple Court, Central Valley, NY Red Apple Court, Central Valley, NY can geocode even though 212 and 266 are located on different segments Pine Hills Road, Orlando, FL The following addresses would not be geocoded to address range for the given reasons: Red Apple Court, Central Valley, NY invalid address range because 212 and 215 have different parity numbers (even and odd) and the segment does not allow this Red Apple Court, Central Valley, NY invalid address range because 10 does not exist Pine Hills Road, Orlando, FL invalid address range because the first number is greater than the second number Columbia Avenue, Lancaster, PA address range geocoding is not attempted because removing the hyphen produces a close match on 1014 Columbia Avenue. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 58

59 Geocoding with MapMarker Postal Geocoding As an alternative to street-level geocoding, you can specify for MapMarker to geocode your records to the appropriate ZIP Code centroid. This is called Postal geocoding. This is a fast method of geocoding because it eliminates the need to match based on street address. This method matches the ZIP Code in your table with the ZIP Code in the Address Dictionary. MapMarker geocodes to the most precise ZIP Code level contained in your table. Use ZIP Code centroid matching when you have a large database that you want to geocode quickly and you are less concerned with spotting the points to street level. To geocode to ZIP Code centroids: 1. In the Geocode dialog, select To ZIP Centroid under Geocode Precision. 2. Choose the range and type of rows you want to geocode. 3. Click Geocode. MapMarker updates the Automatic Geocode dialog every 25 records. 4. When through, click Done to view the log file or return to the MapMarker menu. Geographic Geocoding Geocoding to geographic centroids provides another fast alternative to street-level geocoding that you can use when you do not need an exact match on the street address. Geographic geocoding is less precise than street or postal geocoding, but may be suitable for certain applications. You can also use geographic geocoding as a fallback option (see Fallback Dialog on page 75) if MapMarker cannot match a record to the level or precision you originally requested (such as street level). MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 59

60 Geocoding with MapMarker For geographic geocoding, MapMarker returns the most precise geographic centroid that it can, based on the user input. To geocode to geographic centroids: 5. At the Geocode dialog in the Geocode Precision group, choose To Geographic Centroid. 6. Choose the range and type of rows you want to geocode. 7. Click Geocode. Displaying Geocoded Records in MapInfo Professional After MapMarker geocodes your records, you can display them in MapInfo Professional or MapX to analyze them geographically. 1. Close your table in MapMarker and open it in MapInfo Professional or add it to your MapX geoset. The points are displayed with color-coded symbols that represent the level of geocoding precision for the record, as described below. Magenta stars: all records matched to a single address point. No interpolation is required (S8 result code) Orange stars: all records geocoded an interpolated point along the candidate s street segment (S7 result code) Purple stars: all records geocoded to point ZIP locations (S6, M6 and Z6 result codes) MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 60

61 Geocoding with MapMarker Maroon stars: records offset a specified distance along the perpendicular between the original parcel/point to the associated street segment. (SC result code). Green stars: all records geocoded to a street address (S5 and M5 result codes) Blue stars: all records geocoded to a shape path centroid (S4, M4 result codes) Yellow stars: all records geocoded to a ZIP + 4 centroid (S3, M3 and Z3 result codes) Cyan stars: all records geocoded to a ZIP + 2 centroid (S2, M2 and Z2 result codes) Red stars: all records geocoded to a ZIP Code centroid, including highway exits (S1, M1 and Z1 result codes) Black stars: all records geocoded to intersections (Mx and Sx result codes) Black circles: all records geocoded to a state geographic centroid (G1 result code) Red circles: all records geocoded to a county geographic centroid (G2 result code) Blue circles: all records geocoded to a city/town geographic centroid (G3 result code) See Result Codes for an explanation of the types of result codes. 2. Add other map layers such as MapMarker Streets or ZIP Code boundaries to give your points a geographic reference. You are now ready to analyze your data geographically. using Pitney Bowes mapping software. When displaying your geocoded points over street data, use MapMarker Streets, StreetInfo, or StreetPro display (products that use TIGER 2000 street geometry). When geocoding with MapMarker, be sure to display over enhanced TIGER 2000 street geometry, such as MapMarker Streets or StreetPro Enhanced or Display. This preserves the positional accuracy of the points with respect to the street geometry. Re-Geocoding a Table After you have geocoded a table, existing records may be updated or new records may be added, so you may need to geocode again. New or previously ungeocoded records (records that do not have result codes) can simply be re-geocoded. By default. MapMarker automatically geocodes only unmatched records. This means that for a large database, previously matched records are not re-matched, thus saving time. Records that already contain coordinates, but are incorrect (due to a change in address for example), should be identified and the result codes should be deleted. MapMarker treats any record without a result code as an unmatched record and attempts to find a match. MapMarker also re-geocodes records with N or ND codes. Your records may already include geometry objects (such as points) that were added from another source (such as from MapInfo Professional). MapMarker can replace the points for matched geocoded records (if you specify that action in the Geocode dialog). MapMarker deletes existing points for records that it cannot match. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 61

62 Geocoding with MapMarker Using Geocoding Options This section discusses geocoding options that affect the conditions under which MapMarker attempts to match a record. This includes automatic or interactive geocoding, match settings, fallback options, how to handle multiple matches, log files, table attribution, CASS settings, and many other choices. Geocoding options and preferences give you a great deal of control over the accuracy and precision of your geocoding operation. Among the capabilities are: Specify the level of geocoding precision, automatic or interactive geocoding, and the range of records to geocode. Specify criteria that must be matched (match settings) to return a candidate. Use search level settings to implement expanded search or to limit results to finance area or city. Prefer ZIP Code match over city name match Provide fallback options to broaden the possible candidate list in case a close match is not initially identified. Determine how to choose candidates when multiple candidates are identified as close matches. Changing match settings can affect the hit rate of successfully geocoded records. It can also affect the time it takes for MapMarker to geocode a table, as well as the precision with which the geocoded record is displayed on a map. It is important to keep in mind your intended use of geocoded data when setting these conditions. These settings are set for individual tables and the information is stored in the table s metadata. Accept or change any of the matching criteria to fit your needs. For example, by deselecting Exact Match requirements, MapMarker can potentially match more records, but may return some false positives. To set geocoding preferences for a table: 1. On the Table menu, click Geocode. The Geocode dialog appears. 2. Choose the settings you want from any of the geocoding preferences tabs: Geocode, Log File, Match Settings, Fallback, or Multiple Match. 3. Click Apply to set the changes or Geocode to geocode immediately. For information on each of the tabs, see: Geocode Dialog on page 63 Log File Dialog on page 65 Match Settings Dialog on page 66 Fallback Dialog on page 75 Multiple Match Dialog on page 76 MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 62

63 Geocoding with MapMarker Geocode Dialog The Geocode dialog allows you to select a variety of preferences that control the method, precision, range, and levels of geocoding. Geocode Precision Geocoding precision is a measure of how close a match is to the true location of the record you want to geocode. MapMarker has Street Level, ZIP centroid, and Geographic precision. Street Level precision means that MapMarker attempts to geocode all records to street address, but some matches may end up at a less precise location such as a ZIP centroid (ZIP + 4, ZIP + 2, or ZIP Code ) or shape path. ZIP Centroid precision means that MapMarker attempts to match a record to the most precise ZIP Code it finds. Keep in mind that a match to a ZIP + 4 centroid is nearly as precise as a match to a street address. The added bonus of ZIP Centroid matching is the speed of the operation; MapMarker processes records faster if it only has to match on the ZIP Code. The disadvantage of ZIP Code matching is that MapMarker only examines the ZIP Code field. If your records only contain 5-digit ZIP Codes, MapMarker can do no better than match to 5-digit ZIP Code centroids. If you use street level precision, MapMarker looks at both the street name and ZIP Code fields and attempts to return street level coordinates and falls back to ZIP Code coordinates, optionally to ZIP + 4 centroid. Geographic precision is to the city, county, or state geographic centroid. See Geographic Geocoding on page 59 for details. Street Level Geocoding Method Preference The geocoding Method list allows you to select the geocoding method for Street Level geocoding. MapMarker processes records automatically or interactively. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 63

64 Geocoding with MapMarker For automatic geocoding, the operation continues until all records are processed or the operation is cancelled. For interactive geocoding, MapMarker geocodes records automatically, but stops on each record for which it cannot make a single match. You can then choose the best match from a list of candidates. Type of Rows to Geocode The Unmatched Rows selection means that MapMarker attempts to geocode addresses in your input table only if those addresses have not previously been matched (rows for which the GeoResult field: blank or N). Addresses that already have been geocoded are not re-geocoded. Unmatched Rows is the default selection. You can click All Types to geocode all rows, regardless of whether they have been previously geocoded. You can also click Georesult less than and select a level of geocoding from the drop-down list. This re-geocodes addresses that were originally matched below the given level of precision. Use Georesult less than only with a table that has already been geocoded. If you use this option with a table that has not been geocoded, MapMarker geocodes all of the rows regardless of this selection. Range to Geocode The All Rows selection means that MapMarker attempts to geocode all rows in your input table. You can also select Row Numbers and select a range of row numbers for geocoding. Matched Case Preference Use Return Street Output in Mixed Letter Case to write matched output street addresses in mixed-case (for example, 12 Front St). The input street column remains unchanged. An output address without a house number remains in uppercase. This is to accommodate cases such as PO BOX 233. In mixed case output, streets such as McFly are handled so that the letter following Mc is capitalized. However, words like MacIntosh are not handled because it cannot be differentiated from cases like Macoun. Attribution Bindings MapMarker has the ability to add information from one table to another, either before, during, or after the geocoding process. This ability is called attribution binding. To begin the process of attribution binding (or simply to display or modify existing attribute bindings), click Configure Attribution. This displays the Bind Attribute Table Columns to Output Columns dialog. Table attribution described fully in the topic Table Attribution with MapMarker. For related information, see: Using Geocoding Options on page 62 Log File Dialog on page 65 Match Settings Dialog on page 66 MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 64

65 Geocoding with MapMarker Fallback Dialog on page 75 Multiple Match Dialog on page 76 Log File Dialog The log file is a text file that MapMarker generates during geocoding that contains setup and processing information about the geocoding session. If you do not specify another name, the log file is named mapmarkr.log and contains the results of the session, including number of matches, non-matches, previously matched records, and the number of matched records by result code. MapMarker appends new information to the top of the log file after each geocoding pass. By default, the log file is written to the My Documents\MapMarker USA folder. CASS reports and MapMarker batch files are also written to this area by default. The maximum file size for the log file is 1 MB. Note: By default, the error files IgnoredErrors.txt and ODBCErr.log are created in the following area. Note that ProgramData is a hidden folder: C:\ProgramData\MapInfo\MapMarker\USA\29.0 Select the Log File tab to control log file options. To specify a different log file name, select the Specify Log File Name check box in the Log File tab of the Geocode dialog. You may enter a path as well as a name for the log file (for example, c:\temp\us_addr.log). If the path specified is invalid, MapMarker creates MapMarker.log in the My Documents\MapMarker USA folder. In Windows 2003/XP, you must close the log file from a previous session before you can open the table it refers to in MapMarker. If you do not, a message that the table may not have read/write access is displayed. Close the table in the text editor to proceed. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 65

66 Geocoding with MapMarker In addition to creating a log file with the results of the geocoding operation, you can generate a table summary that shows the results of the geocoding. To do so, select Table > Table Summary and specify the column in your table that contains the georesults of the active table. The Save As dialog appears allowing you to save this information as a text file. For related information, see: Using Geocoding Options on page 62 Geocode Dialog on page 63) Match Settings Dialog on page 66) Fallback Dialog on page 75 Multiple Match Dialog on page 76) Match Settings Dialog The Match Settings tab lets you specify how precisely MapMarker matches input addresses against the Address Dictionary. By adjusting match settings, you can control whether MapMarker requires a very precise match, a less restrictive match, or an intermediate level of matching. The best choice for you depends on the nature of your data and the requirements of your application. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 66

67 Geocoding with MapMarker Match Modes You can select one of the match modes to control the variance allowed between an input address and the matched address. Less variance ensures the highest quality matches. More variance can provide high quality matches on badly formatted or incomplete input addresses, but requires additional processing time. The Standard, Tight, and Relaxed Match Modes use internal algorithms to achieve matching results. CASS Mode allows you to produce a CASS report (assuming that CASS data is available). You can also select Custom (Exact Match On) to achieve more precise control over your matching results.. Match Modes Match Mode Standard Tight Description This is the default mode, and generally provides the best balance of accurate geocoding, few false matches, and high performance. This requires a close (not necessarily exact) street name match. This uses the most strict matching rules and requires an exact street name match. In general, this returns the fewest number of candidates in the fastest processing time. There will be fewer non-close matches than are returned in Standard or Relaxed mode. Tight mode is most suitable when your input addresses are complete, well standardized, and free of spelling errors. Note: Tight mode is not equivalent to selecting Custom matching with all Exact Match criteria checked. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 67

68 Geocoding with MapMarker Match Modes (Continued) Match Mode Relaxed This provides less strict matching rules. In general, Relaxed mode increases your chances of getting a close match but performance (geocoding speed) may not be as good. Relaxed mode: Description allows the most variation in street name spelling, and therefore may return desirable candidates that are not returned in other modes. is most suitable when your input addresses are not well standardized, incomplete, or may contain spelling errors. is the only mode that does not respect street parity. is more likely to return false positive candidates. may (but does not always) return more candidates than other modes. generally will perform more slowly than other modes. is best used as a second or third geocoding pass. See Using Wide Search with Multiple Pass Strategy on page 74 and Using a Multiple Pass Strategy on page 91. strategies of optimizing match rates using multiple geocoding passes. is best used if you examine the Match codes and Location codes to verify how the address was matched, what address elements were changed to achieve the match, and the locational accuracy of the geocode. See Match Codes and Location Codes on page 266. Note: Relaxed mode is not equivalent to selecting Custom matching with all Exact Match criteria unchecked. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 68

69 Geocoding with MapMarker Match Modes (Continued) Match Mode CASS Custom (Exact Match On) Description This provides strict conformity to USPS CASS regulations for CASS software. Use CASS mode to standardize your input for mailing. If you select CASS Mode, several other options are disabled and their values are overwritten by CASS rules. CASS mode requires a close name match. Unlike other modes, CASS does not match intersection addresses, building name, or street aliases. CASS also does not match based on a user dictionary or any data source that does not have USPS equivalent records. In other modes, a close match candidate may by identified very quickly and this candidate is returned without further processing. However, in CASS mode, the first identified close match may not be the best USPS candidate (for example it could be a building name while the preferred USPS candidate is a business name). A CASS mode search must continue to ensure that the best USPS candidate is returned. For this reason, CASS mode can return more records than in other modes. See CASS related Selections on page 70. Custom allows you to select any combination of Exact Match constraints rather than relying on any of the match mode algorithms. This gives you very precise control over the matching. See Exact Match On for a description of all the Exact Match settings. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 69

70 Geocoding with MapMarker Exact Match On Use the Require Exact Match On criteria to fine-tune your control over geocoding matching preferences. You can specify precise matching criteria based on house number, street name, city name, and ZIP Code. If all specified criteria are not met, then the geocoded candidate is not considered a close match. Exact Match Settings Exact Match Description House number When the House Number box is checked, candidate house numbers must be exactly matched to return a close match. When the House Number box is unchecked, MapMarker can make a close match even if the house number match is not exact. Street name City Name ZIP Code When the Street Name box is checked, candidate street names but be exactly matched to get a geocoding match. When the street name box is unchecked, MapMarker will accept similar street names as a match. This requires an exact match on all elements of the street name. Also, blank input values for these elements will not match non-blank values in the candidate records. Note: Street name exact match also requires an exact match on street type. That is, 147 Rd. must be matched exactly; 147 Ave does not match. When the City Name box is checked, MapMarker requires a city name match. When this box in unchecked, the city name does not have to match. When ZIP Code is checked, ZIP Code must be exactly matched to get a geocoding match. When ZIP Code is unchecked, surrounding ZIP Codes are considered for matching purposes and records with missing ZIP Codes are also considered. CASS related Selections If you selected CASS mode, you can also produce a CASS report (Form 3553). Because the address standardization requirements for CASS are very rigid, you cannot control the geocoding settings you normally have when geocoding with the MapMarker Desktop application. For example, you cannot geocode to a user dictionary when you are CASS geocoding. You cannot geocode using single-line addresses in CASS mode. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 70

71 Geocoding with MapMarker The CASS related options are: CASS Related Options CASS Options Produce a CASS Report Use DPV Use LACSLink Use SuiteLink Return Short Address Return Short City Name Description If you wish to qualify your table for CASS, you must print a report USPS Form If you choose to Produce a CASS Report, the Use DPV and Use LACSLink check boxes are automatically checked. DPV validation is required for CASS reports. See DPV.. Check this box to specify DPV geocoding. The DPV files must be installed and unlocked in order to access this feature. If you choose to Produce a CASS Report, the Use DPV mode check box is automatically checked. This is because DPV validation is required for CASS reports. Check this box to specify LACS Link geocoding. The LACS Link files must be installed and unlocked in order to access this feature. See LACS Link. If you choose to Produce a CASS Report, the Use LACSLink check box is automatically checked. This is because SuiteLink is required for CASS reports Check this box to return Suite Link addresses. See Suite Link. If you choose to Produce a CASS Report, the Use SuiteLink check box is automatically checked. This is because SuiteLink is required for CASS reports. Check this box to return CASS abbreviated addresses. This is optional. See Returning Abbreviated Addresses Check this box to return CASS short city names. This is optional. See Returning Abbreviated Addresses. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 71

72 Geocoding with MapMarker Search Level Settings Search level settings allow you to apply constraints based on a Finance Area, or an area defined by the city, state, and ZIP Code boundaries, or an area within a specified radius from the input address. The Search Level settings are: Search Level Settings Multiple Match Option Finance Area City Expanded search Search distance in miles Limit to current state Description Searches the entire Finance Area for possible streets. A Finance Area may include more than one city of ZIP Code. If you are using CASS mode, the Finance Area constraint is enabled by default. A Finance Area is an area defined by the U.S. Postal Service from which it collects cost and statistical data. A finance area is a collection of ZIP Codes within a contiguous geographic region and can contain more than one ZIP Code or city. Limits the search to the specified city. For all modes except CASS, the city constraint is enabled by default. Searches for an address within a given radius (miles) of the input address. See Using Expanded Search. If Expanded Search is selected, you can specify the distance (up to 99 miles) from the input address that MapMarker will search. If Expanded Search is selected, you can limit the expanded search to the same state of the input address, regardless of the mile radius. Using Expanded Search Expanded search can return candidates within a specified radius of the input address even if the input city is wrong. For example, an address like: One Global View, Albany NY MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 72

73 Geocoding with MapMarker will not normally return a close match candidate in Standard mode with the default City search level because the input city is incorrect. Neither will you get a close match candidate if you select the Finance Area search level. However if you select Expanded search level with a distance of 10 miles, you will get a close match candidate because the correct city of Troy is within 10 miles of Albany. Additional Match Settings The other selections on the Match Settings tab are controlled with the following check boxes in the Additional Settings group. Additional Matching Preferences Option Use Wide Search Accept S5 or Better Street Address Matches Accept S5 Street Address Matches Only Match to Street Intersections Clear Output Columns if No Match Description If checked, the wide search is used. Wide search considers all streets that begin with the first letter of the input street name, and therefore can identify many more potential candidates. Wide search is most often used in combination with Relaxed mode as part of a multiple-pass geocoding strategy. See Using Wide Search with Multiple Pass Strategy on page 74. Check this box if you only want street address matches of S5 or higher accuracy. Check this box if you want S5 street address matches only. If checked, MapMarker can read input street addresses that contain two street names separated by any of the following intersection tokens: and, at, &, &&. For example: Main Street & Washington Avenue This type of matching affects the MapMarker geocoding speed since it requires additional processing. If checked, clears existing output values for a record if a match cannot be made. For example, your table may contain longitude and latitude values obtained from another source, and you want to maintain that information if MapMarker cannot match the record. If not checked, the output information is kept intact even if a geocoding match is not made. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 73

74 Geocoding with MapMarker Additional Matching Preferences (Continued) Option Prefer User Dictionary Matches Prefer Matching ZIP Over Matching City Description If checked, user dictionary close match candidates take precedence over the MapMarker Address Dictionary. See Preferring User Dictionary Matches for information on selecting a user dictionary. If not checked, the Address Dictionary takes precedence. If checked, ZIP Code matches take precedence over city matches when determining a close match candidate. If not checked, a city match is favored over ZIP Code match. For related information on the other Geocoding tabs, see: Using Geocoding Options on page 62 Geocode Dialog on page 63 Log File Dialog on page 65 Fallback Dialog on page 75 Multiple Match Dialog on page 76 Using Wide Search with Multiple Pass Strategy You can increase the probability of a match by using Relaxed mode combined with wide search. Wide search considers all streets that begin with the first letter of the input street name, and therefore can identify more potential candidates. Wide search is most commonly used in combination with Relaxed mode, although is can be used with other match modes or custom constraints. Although wide search can potentially identify more candidates, it reduces the performance (speed of geocoding) and may return some false positive candidates, depending on the quality of your input data. By default wide search is disabled. A multiple-pass geocoding strategy can give you the optimal results. For example, if you are geocoding a table you could use a strategy like this: Pass 1: Geocode addresses using Close mode without wide search. Good quality addresses will be successfully geocoded. Pass 2: Choose the non-matching addresses from Pass 1 and re-geocode these addresses using Relaxed mode with wide search disabled. You can also use wide search in combination with Must Match constraints to more finely control your geocoding results. Pass 3: Choose the non-matching addresses from Pass 2 and re-geocode these addresses using Relaxed mode with wide search enabled. This multiple-pass strategy provides the advantages of best geocoding accuracy, good performance, and fewer false positive candidates. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 74

75 Geocoding with MapMarker You can streamline this strategy by skipping Pass 2. That is, choose the non-matching addresses from Pass, then re-geocode these addresses using Relaxed mode with wide search enabled. To use wide search, select Use Wide Search under Additional Settings in the Match Settings dialog. See also: Match Settings Dialog on page 66 (Use Wide Search check box). Quick Find Settings on page 137 (Use Wide Search check box). The MapMarker USA v29 Developer Guide describes the API methods that control the wide search feature. Fallback Dialog If MapMarker cannot match a record to the level or precision that you have requested (such as street level), it can fall back to use less precise matching criteria. Select the Fallback tab to control these fallback options. For example, you can fall back to match to the ZIP Code centroid, if you have selected the Fallback to ZIP Code Centroid check box in the Fallback tab. You can also define the fallback to a particular level of ZIP Code. For example, if you only want to accept a ZIP + 4 centroid as a fallback match, select ZIP + 4 Centroid Only. By default, MapMarker does not fallback to ZIP centroid. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 75

76 Geocoding with MapMarker You can also select Fallback to Geographic Centroid. If MapMarker cannot return a close match based on the Geocode Precision and Must Match criteria, this option falls back to match on a geographic (state, county, or city) centroid. For related information, see: Using Geocoding Options on page 62 Geocode Dialog on page 63 Log File Dialog on page 65 Match Settings Dialog on page 66 Multiple Match Dialog on page 76 Multiple Match Dialog If MapMarker determines that more than one match candidate exists for a record, it follows the instructions in the Multiple Match tab. Multiple match candidates are potentially strong matches, but none of them stands out enough from the others to be considered the definitive match. Select the Multiple Match tab to control the multiple match options. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 76

77 Geocoding with MapMarker The Multiple Match Options table describes multiple match preferences and how they are used to filter multiple match results. See also, A Closer Look at Multiple Matches. Multiple Match Options Multiple Match Option Do Not Match Accept First Pick Street Address over ZIP + 4 Pick ZIP + 4 over Street Address Description Click this option to disallow any matches for the record if multiple matches occur. Click this option to accept the first candidate for the match. Click this option to accept the candidate with the most accurate street level match. Click this option to accept the candidate with the most accurate ZIP + 4 level match. For related information, see: Using Geocoding Options on page 62 Geocode Dialog on page 63 Log File Dialog on page 65 Match Settings Dialog on page 66 Fallback Dialog on page 75 Saving TAB Files When you save a TAB file, MapMarker saves your geocoding settings and stores them as metadata in your table. These settings include columns mappings and geocoding preferences (such as match settings, fallback settings, and CASS options). The next time you open the TAB file in MapMarker, you can proceed directly to geocoding. You can view the settings by opening the TAB file in a text editor and examining the section called Metadata. You can save a TAB file and its associated metadata as a MapMarker project. A project preserves additional settings and preferences and supersedes any settings in the associated TAB file. See Creating and Saving a Project. You can also save a delimited text file and its associated metadata as a MapMarker project. Note: You must use a project to perform batch geocoding of a delimited text file. For more information on batch geocoding, see Batch Geocoding. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 77

78 Geocoding with MapMarker Creating and Saving a Project After you open an input file and perform column mappings, you can save the file as a project (PROJ file extension). A project preserves the settings used for geocoding a table, including column mappings and geocoding preferences. When you use a project, the project information supersedes the information stored in the table s metadata. You can also create a project based on an ODBC input. However, there are limitations on running an ODBC-based project from a batch file. See the discussion of Batch Geocoding. When you open a project, settings and preferences are restored, including: column mappings settings on the Geocode dialog (Geocode, Log File, Match Settings, Fallback, and Multiple Match tabs) table attribution settings, if any System Preferences on the Dictionary and Offset tabs. relevant ODBC file names, locations, and settings To save a project, first open the input file, perform column mappings, and set geocoding preferences as you normally would. See Opening a Table or Text File on page 36 and subsequent topics. Then follow these steps: 1. From the MapMarker menu, Select File > Projects > Create/Save Project. 2. In the Save Project File As dialog box, type a project name. A PROJ file extension is used. When you subsequently open the project, settings and preferences are restored. For example, if you had created a project with changes to the default geocode, match settings, fallback, and user dictionary preferences, all of these settings are restored when you open the project. You can create multiple projects based on the same TAB or text input file. By creating unique projects based on the same input data, you can design, preserve, and manage multiple geocoding strategies customized to suit your needs. For example, you could create a project named CustomerStats_Exact.proj that performs geocoding based on the rules and MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 78

79 Geocoding with MapMarker preferences that you specify. You could create another project named CustomerStats_RelaxedMode.proj that geocodes the same TAB file using the Relaxed Mode matching criteria. Note: If you created a project in an earlier version of MapMarker, the project will still be using the older Address Dictionary. If you re-save the project using the same name (overwriting the original project name), the project will then point to the new MapMarker USA 29 Address Dictionary. Alternatively, you can edit the DataBasePath entry in the PROJ file to point to the location of the Address Dictionary (by default, <install>\mapmarker_usa_29_data). To open and run a previously saved project, see Opening and Running a Project on page 35. You can also run a project from the command line using a project-based batch file. See the following topics: Creating a Project-Based Batch File on page 78 Creating a Batch Geocoding File from a TAB File on page 143 Creating a Project-Based Batch File After creating a MapMarker project, you can create a batch file to execute the project. Using a project-based batch file is the only way to perform batch geocoding of a CSV or TXT file. Note: For TAB files, you can create a batch file without creating a project. This procedure is described in Creating a Batch Geocoding File from a TAB File. However you can also use the project-based batch file approach for TAB files. First create the MapMarker project, as described in Creating and Saving a Project on page 77. To create a batch file that executes a MapMarker project, follow these steps: 1. From the MapMarker menu, select File > Create Project-based Batch File. 2. In the Select Project Files dialog, navigate to the directory that contains the project file. Select the project file that you want to run in batch and click Add to move it into the Selected Projects column. You can run multiple projects from the same batch file. See Multiple Pass Batch Geocoding Strategy on page 80. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 79

80 Geocoding with MapMarker 3. Click OK to open the Save Batch File As dialog. Use the Save in drop-down selection to navigate to the directory where you want to save the batch file. Accept the default file name or change the name of the BAT file. Click Save. A project-based batch file points to the MapMarker executable and runs the project file. The location of the input file, names of columns, and geocoding preferences are encapsulated in the project (PROJ) file itself. A project-based batch file might appear as follows: "C:\Program Files\MapInfo\MapMarker_USA_v29\desktop\mapmarkr.exe" /Proj=C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\My Documents\MapMarker USA\Projects\1k_out_spat_ExactMatch.proj Multiple Pass Batch Geocoding Strategy You can run multiple projects from the same batch file. The projects listed in the batch file are executed in succession. These projects could be based on different input files. For example, the batch file could perform a geocoding pass on California-based addresses then run subsequent passes on Arizona-based addresses, etc. For a project based on TAB file, a batch file can also run multiple geocoding passes on the same TAB file. For example, the batch file could run the "Exact" match project on a Quebec addresses TAB file followed by a "Relaxed" match project on the same Quebec addresses TAB file. This strategy allows you to perform batch geocoding based on precise Must Match criteria, then perform a less restrictive second pass on addresses that did not geocode during the first pass. There is one important guideline for using this strategy on TAB files. While the Exact match project would typically geocode all records (All Types in the Geocode dialog), the Relaxed match project should geocode Unmatched Rows only. This ensures that the output from the Relaxed match geocoding pass does not overwrite the output from the initial Exact match pass. For a project based on a delimited or text file (CSV or TXT), you cannot do multiple batch geocoding passes of the same address file because the initial output file will be overwritten. That is, a Quebec_Address_out.csv file created by the Relaxed match batch geocoding MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 80

81 Geocoding with MapMarker pass will overwrite the identically named output file created by the Exact match pass. Therefore, project-based batch files that use CSV or TXT files should specify different input files (for example, address files from different provinces). MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 81

82 3 3 MapMarker System Preferences This chapter discusses the system preferences that allow you to customize MapMarker. In this chapter: Setting System Preferences 83 Startup Preferences 83 Dictionary Preferences 84 Offset System Preferences 85 Maps System Preferences 86

83 MapMarker System Preferences Setting System Preferences The System Preferences dialog is displayed when you click System Preferences on the Options menu. Click, or click the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu and then click System Preferences. The System Preferences dialog contains the tabs: Startup, Dictionary, Offset, and Maps. Any changes you make in these tabs are written to the Windows Registry at: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\MAPINFO\MAPMARKER\USA\<version number>\system These changes are also saved for future geocoding sessions. Note: In the MapMarker registry keys, <version number> indicates the major-release version of MapMarker, for example, 29.0, even if you are running one of the point releases of that version. Startup Preferences The Startup tab identifies the settings MapMarker uses when you start the application. You can select any and all check boxes in the tab. If you select either Show MapInfo or dbase files or Show for ODBC tables, the Open dialog is displayed automatically when you start MapMarker. If you check both boxes, MapMarker prompts you with another dialog at startup to choose which type of table you want to open. The Startup System Preferences appear as follows: MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 83

84 MapMarker System Preferences You can also control which of the System Preference dialogs, if any, display on startup. Choose from: Show Select Column Dialog On Open (selected by default) Select Attribute Files After Selecting Columns Show Geocode Dialog After Selecting Columns (selected by default) Show Add Georesult, Longitude/Latitude Columns Dialog (selected by default) The settings are saved to the table as metadata and used as new defaults when you open the table again. Dictionary Preferences The Address Dictionary group identifies the path(s) of all installed address dictionaries. The Address Dictionary covers all of USA or individual provinces, depending on what you purchased and installed. You can add additional paths to the list at any time by separating each path with a semicolon. You do not need to specify the file name. A user dictionary is a custom dictionary that you have created from your own data or data that you purchased from a third party. A custom user dictionary can contain address point data for the area that you are geocoding, and this can give you more accurate results than the standard address dictionary. In order to geocode with a user dictionary, you must specify the path. For complete information on user dictionaries, see User Dictionary Utility.. The Dictionary Preferences appear as follows: MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 84

85 MapMarker System Preferences You can also specify customized dictionaries that contain street addresses that are not included in the purchased Address Dictionary. To use a customized dictionary, select the check box marked Use User Dictionary and enter the path or browse to its location. You can geocode using both the MapMarker Address Dictionary and a customized dictionary. To use a customized dictionary, select the check box marked Use User Dictionary and type the path or browse to its location. Check both boxes if you want to geocode using both the MapMarker Address Dictionary and a customized dictionary. When both the Address and the user dictionaries return a close match, the Address dictionary takes precedence by default. To give precedence to user dictionary, see Preferring User Dictionary Matches. The Use Address Point Interpolation check box enables address point interpolation during geocoding. This technique allows MapMarker to accurately interpolate points along a street segment in relation to address point candidates that are found on that segment. This process increases the positional accuracy of the geocoded points. See Interpreting S7 Result Codes on page 101 for a description of the S7 results returned by address point interpolation. Offset System Preferences These Street Offset values specify the distance that geocoded points are offset from the original interpolated points. When changing the units of the offset distance, be sure to also type the appropriate offset distance values, since changing the units does not automatically recalculate the offset values. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 85

86 MapMarker System Preferences The Offset Preferences dialog allows you to control the offset preferences. Street Offsets In the Street Offsets group, the Offset From Road and Offset From Corner selections specify the distance that interpolated points are offset from the street corner and from the street segment, respectively. You can specify the offset in feet, meters, or other common units. The default is 25 feet. Center Line Offset The Use Center Line Offset selection specifies the distance that geocoded points are offset from the associated street segment (rather than being placed exactly at the original point). Center Line Offset is available if you are geocoding with a point-based Address Dictionary. Where possible, the coordinates are offset perpendicularly from the segment. Center Line Offset is disabled by default but you can enable it and specify the offset distance and units. The default is 25 feet. When changing any of the offset units (for example, from feet to meters), be sure to also enter the appropriate offset distance values, since changing the units does not automatically recalculate the offset values. Maps System Preferences In order to display match candidates in a Map window from the Interactive or Quick Find dialog boxes, MapMarker must know where the street data is located on your system. The Maps tab on the System Preferences dialog allows you to set the directory path to the street data. Note: If you do not specify a valid location of the street data, the Map and Range buttons on the Interactive or Quick Find dialog boxes will be disabled. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 86

87 MapMarker System Preferences The Map System Preferences are displayed and selected as follows: This also enables you to set an initial display radius for the Candidate Visualization Map window. The radius is the distance in miles around the first match candidate that MapMarker finds among multiple matches when you geocode interactively. Set this distance in the Maximum Candidate Map Zoom Distance field. The default value is five miles. You can set the distance from 1 99 miles. Use the zoom in and zoom out tools in the Candidate Visualization Map window to control the view of the map, and choose how much data you want to view in the Map window. For best results when geocoding with MapMarker, use MapMarker Streets or StreetPro Enhanced as the background street map. These street packages are geographically consistent with the street data in the MapMarker Address Dictionary. For information on how to quickly visualize candidates on a map, see Viewing Match Candidates on a Map. For information on visualizing candidates from the Quick Find dialog box, see Finding Candidates Using Quick Find MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 87

88 4 4 Match Settings and Strategies In this chapter: Using Match Settings to Control Geocoding Precision 89 Choosing Match Strategies 89\ Using a Multiple Pass Strategy 91 Specifying Match Settings 92 Viewing Match Candidates on a Map 94 A Closer Look at Multiple Matches 95

89 Match Settings and Strategies Using Match Settings to Control Geocoding Precision The Geocode dialog includes tabs that allow you to control the Match Settings, Fallback, and Multiple Match settings for a geocoding pass. This allows you to control how restrictive MapMarker is in identifying close match candidates. Each of the settings affect the match rate, performance, and the positional accuracy of the geocoded point. You must decide the settings that best fit you strategy and requirements. See Choosing Match Strategies. Default Settings The default settings, which generally give you the best compromise among match rate, accuracy, and performance, are: Require an exact match for house number only. See Match Settings Dialog. Do not fall back to ZIP Code centroid matching. Uncheck the setting in the Fallback dialog. See Fallback Dialog. Do not match if there are multiple match candidates. Uncheck the setting in Multiple Match dialog. See Multiple Match Dialog. Choosing Match Strategies You can use several matching strategies, including: Maximizing the Match Rate on page 89 Maximizing Geographic Accuracy on page 90 Balancing Match Rate and False Positives on page 90 You can choose one method or use them in combination. Maximizing the Match Rate To generate the highest match rate possible, remove the match restrictions on house number, ZIP Code, and street names in the Match Settings tab by unchecking those boxes. In addition, select Accept First (Multiple Match tab) and Fallback to ZIP Centroid (Fallback tab). Less restrictive match settings allow MapMarker to broaden the area in which it searches for a match. For example, if a ZIP Code match is not specified, MapMarker can find candidates outside the ZIP Code but within the city or financial area of your input address. To maximize the potential for a match, tell MapMarker what to do if it does not find a match. These settings include Fallback to ZIP Code matching and match to the first of multiple matches. See Fallback Dialog and Multiple Match Dialog. While this strategy likely yields false positives, this may be the best match solution when you have large databases that need to be geocoded. You must decide if the percentage of false positives affects your analysis. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 89

90 Match Settings and Strategies Note: You can evaluate false positives if you have MapMarker use output columns to store the returned street, city, state, and ZIP Code values. See Selecting Input and Output Address Columns. Look for false positives by comparing the input address with the output address. To further reduce the number of false positives without sacrificing hit rate, analyze the result codes after a geocoding session and re-geocode interactively. See Result Codes for more information on result codes. Maximizing Geographic Accuracy If positional accuracy of the geocoded records is the most important aspect for you, choose a strategy in which MapMarker returns the lowest number of erroneous matches. To do this, you must require MapMarker to find exact matches for all portions of the address house number, street name, city, and ZIP Code. Also, do not accept the first of multiple matches or fall back to ZIP centroid. These records remain ungeocoded. The strictest match settings require an exact match on house number, street name, city name, and ZIP Code. In that case, MapMarker is looking for an exact street address match within the city and ZIP Code named in your input address. Choose this scenario when your analysis requires precise locations for your records. To increase the number of matches, your next step might be to use interactive geocoding. Interactive geocoding is explained in Making the Most of Interactive Geocoding. Balancing Match Rate and False Positives You may want to use a balanced strategy between match rate and geographic accuracy. That is, you may want to geocode as many records as possible automatically, but at the same time want to minimize the number of erroneous matches (false positives). Rather than generate false positives, you could leave those records ungeocoded so that you can geocode them interactively later. You may want to analyze your data at a local level where the location of each record on a map is important. MapMarker may return false positives when it: finds a street that sounds like the input street. finds the same street in another town (if ZIP Code match is not specified). finds the street but with a different house number (if House Number is not specified). MapMarker, however, contains a sophisticated matcher that usually finds the correct address. MapMarker Standard mode achieves a balance of accurate geocoding, few false matches, and high performance. Standard mode requires a close (not necessarily exact) street name match. You can use other match modes or custom match settings to achieve the best match strategy for your data and requirements. See Match Settings Dialog on page 66 and related topics for descriptions of match modes, exact match settings, and other constraints that affect the match rate and performance. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 90

91 Match Settings and Strategies Using a Multiple Pass Strategy The following scenario outlines a three-pass geocoding session based on the strategy of maximizing the match rate. See Maximizing the Match Rate on page 89 for an overview of that strategy. You generally want to generate the highest match rate for a large database while minimizing false positives. To achieve this, use a restrictive matching strategy in the first pass, then follow with an interactive session to pick up additional matches, and finally, a third pass to ZIP Code centroids to geocode any remaining records. First Pass on page 91 Second Pass on page 91 Third Pass on page 92 One Pass Settings on page 92 First Pass Geocode the table automatically with the settings that generate the highest match rate with the fewest false positives: Require exact match on House Number but do not require match on Street Name or ZIP Code. (Although for a stricter matching first pass you could require exact match on street name and ZIP Code.) Do not accept first of multiple matches. Do not fallback to ZIP Code centroid matching. All records geocoded during this pass are exact or close matches that geocode to the street level. Depending on the cleanliness of your data, the majority of your table is processed during this pass. This pass generates the least number of false positive matches. Second Pass For this pass, geocode all unmatched rows interactively with the following settings: Uncheck the settings for house number, street name, and ZIP Code. Do not accept first of multiple matches. Do not fallback to ZIP Code centroid matching. Edit the input address where necessary to increase the likelihood of a match. Each match in this pass is still at street level accuracy. Since you are in interactive mode, you control every match, thus, minimizing the number of false positives. You can also change the match settings, expand the Search, map the match candidates, and edit the record to find additional matches. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 91

92 Match Settings and Strategies Third Pass Do a final geocoding pass on unmatched rows by geocoding to ZIP Centroid. Set the geocoding precision in the Geocode dialog to To ZIP Centroid. This pass picks up virtually all remaining records and geocodes them to ZIP Code centroid accuracy. If your data includes ZIP + 4 information, some of these ZIP Code centroid matches could geocode to the street level in as nearly the same location as unique and close street matches from the first pass. One Pass Settings If you do not want to geocode your table interactively, combine the first and third passes using the following settings in the Options dialog: Require exact match on House Number. Do not require match on Street Name or ZIP Code. Do not accept first of multiple matches. Select Fallback to ZIP Centroids. Specifying Match Settings Consider the following when you change the Match Settings in the Geocode dialog. See Match Settings Dialog for a detailed description of the choices in this dialog. See the following topics: City Name Matching on page 93 Street Name Matching on page 93 House Number Matching on page 93 Matching to Street Intersections on page 93 Geocoding to ZIP Centroids versus Falling Back to ZIP Centroid on page 93 Preferring User Dictionary Matches on page 94 ZIP Code Matching If you do not specify ZIP Codes matching, MapMarker searches a wider area for a match. While this causes slower performance, the match rate is higher because MapMarker does not need to match exactly when it compares match candidates. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 92

93 Match Settings and Strategies City Name Matching If you do not specify city name matching, MapMarker searches on the street address matched to the particular ZIP Code, and considers other cities that do not match the city name. Street Name Matching MapMarker looks at all candidates with names that sound like the input address. This slows down performance. However, since more candidates are examined, the match rate increases. If your table is indexed, the time difference between performance and match rate is reduced. House Number Matching Performance is not significantly affected by the house number matching requirement. It does, however, affect the type of match if the candidate address corresponds to a TIGER segment that does not contain any ranges. The type of match can also be affected if the house number range for a candidate does not contain the input house number. Matching to Street Intersections For MapMarker to recognize street intersections, your table must be set up in either of the following ways: Address1 and Address2 must be contained in the same field separated by any of the following intersection tokens: and, at, &, &&. Address1 and Address2 are in separate fields, but the Use Address2 as Intersection Cross Street check box must be selected in the Select input columns from your table dialog. Note: Intersection matching does require increased processing time. Geocoding to ZIP Centroids versus Falling Back to ZIP Centroid When MapMarker matches to ZIP centroid it looks only at the ZIP Code in the input address. If your data has a 5-digit ZIP Code, MapMarker can only match to the 5-digit ZIP centroid. If, on the other hand, you geocoded the same record at street level with a fallback to ZIP centroid, MapMarker takes into account both the 5-digit ZIP Code and street name and is more likely to match it to a more precise location than the 5-digit ZIP centroid. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 93

94 Match Settings and Strategies Preferring User Dictionary Matches If you select Prefer User Dictionary Matches on the Match Settings tab, candidates from the User Dictionary are given a higher score than a similar candidate from the Address Dictionary. This preference is designed for situations where you feel your User Dictionary is superior to the MapMarker Address Dictionary. This selection is available only if a User Dictionary has been specified. See Dictionary Preferences. Viewing Match Candidates on a Map Candidate visualization allows you to see where potential matches fall on a map to help you determine the best match for your address. You can display match candidates in relation to a street network, using the appropriate Pitney Bowes products. If you geocode your table with MapMarker USA 29, you can display the records with MapMarker Streets or StreetPro Enhanced products. Candidate visualization is accessible via the Map button in the Interactive Geocode and Quick Find dialog boxes. Setting the Street Data Path Before mapping your candidates, specify the location of your street data in the Map tab of the System Preferences dialog (Options > System Preferences). You can also control which layers you want displayed in the map. See Maps System Preferences. Note: If you did not previously specify a valid location of the street data, the Map button on the Interactive or Quick Find dialog boxes will be disabled. Viewing Match Candidates With Interactive Geocoding Use candidate visualization with interactive geocoding to select the point on the map that represents your match choice. MapMarker geocodes to that record. To view potential matches on a map during interactive geocoding: 1. From the Interactive dialog box, proceed through the table until you reach a record with a list of match candidates that you want to view on a map. 2. Click Map. MapMarker creates a map view of all match candidates in the list. Each candidate is displayed with the color representing match type. For example, green stars are candidates that match to the street address (S5) and yellow stars are those that match to the ZIP + 4 centroid (S3 or Z3). See Displaying Geocoded Records in MapInfo Professional for more information on these symbols. 3. Use the tools provided to pan, zoom, and label the map to help you decide the best match candidate for the address. The label tool allows you to label nearby streets and features to provide a geographic reference for the candidates. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 94

95 Match Settings and Strategies 4. When you decide the best match, click the candidate symbol with the Select tool and click OK. You are returned to the Interactive dialog box. Your choice is highlighted in the candidate list. 5. Click Geocode if you want to geocode the selected candidate. Note: You can also use candidate visualization as part of the Quick Find feature. See Finding Candidates Using Quick Find for a description of this. A Closer Look at Multiple Matches A multiple match is when MapMarker finds more than one record in the Address Dictionary that covers the same address range. Multiple match candidates are potentially strong matches, but none of them stands out enough from the others to be considered the definitive match. You can control how you want MapMarker to respond when it encounters a multiple match. Select the Multiple Match tab to control the multiple match options. The Multiple Match Options table describes multiple match preferences and how they are used to filter multiple match results. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 95

96 Match Settings and Strategies Multiple Match Options Multiple Match Option Do Not Match Accept First Pick Street Address overzip+4 Pick ZIP+4 over Street Address Description Click this option to disallow any matches for the record if multiple matches occur. During interactive geocoding, MapMarker stops at that record and waits for your response. Sometimes it finds multiple matches, even though there is a candidate that appears to be an exact match. In this situation, it is important to examine the ranges associated with the candidate to make the best judgement about whether to match to the candidate. Click this option to accept the first candidate for the match. Click this option to accept the candidate with the most accurate street level match. Click this option to accept the candidate with the most accurate postal code level match. Consider the following example. MapMarker determined that there are multiple matches for 981 Howard St. in San Francisco, even though it appears one candidate matches the record. By clicking Ranges and scrolling through the list of ranges, you see that there are four address ranges shown that cover 981 Howard St. Because the multiple match setting is set to Do Not Match, MapMarker stops geocoding at this point and waits for you to choose the match or ignore it. By clicking Geocode in this example, MapMarker generates an S result code, which means a single close match was made. If the restriction had been set to one of the other choices in the Multiple Match tab, this record would not appear in the Interactive dialog because MapMarker would geocode it automatically. If the setting was Accept First, Pick Street Address over ZIP + 4, or Pick ZIP + 4 over Street Address, the result code would be an M result. For more on result codes, see Understanding Result Codes. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 96

97 5 5 Result Codes In this chapter: Understanding Result Codes 98 Best Match From Multiple Candidates (M category) 102 Postal Centroid Matches (Z category) 103 Geographic Matches (G category) 103 Reverse Geocoded Matches (R category) 104 Non-match Codes (N category) 104 Using the Georesult Dialog 104

98 Result Codes Understanding Result Codes As an output option, MapMarker returns a georesult code for every record it attempts to match. The code indicates the success or failure of the geocoding operation and conveys information about the quality of the match. Each character of the code indicates the level of precision of each address component matched. The result codes are written to a result column specified in the Select Output Columns dialog at the beginning of the geocoding process. You can either create this column before geocoding or have MapMarker create it automatically (default name Georesult) when you open your table. The result code is an alphanumeric code of 1 10 characters. The codes fall into the following categories: Single unique match Best match from multiple candidates ZIP Code centroid match Geographic match Non-match The match precision depends on the match settings that you choose. See Match Settings and Strategies in Chapter 4 on page 88. Match precision also depends on the quality of the input address data and on the quality of the Address or User Dictionary. Each category is explained in the following topics. Single Match (S category) on page 99 Best Match From Multiple Candidates (M category) on page 102 Postal Centroid Matches (Z category) on page 103 Geographic Matches (G category) on page 103 Non-match Codes (N category) on page 104 MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 98

99 Result Codes Using the Georesult Dialog on page 104 Single Match (S category) Matches in the S category indicate that the record was matched to a single address candidate. The first character (S) reflects that MapMarker found a street address that matches your record. Within this category, a number of precision levels have been defined. The precision affects the location of the geocoded point on the map. An address matched to a street address position has greater positional accuracy than one matched to a ZIP Code centroid. Matches in the S category can have the following types of precision: Address point Using address point interpolation, an address location is estimated based on a street segment and the known address ranges and address points along that segment. Address point interpolation places geocoded points more accurately along the street segment and can prevent the bunching of points that can occur at either end of a street segment. See Interpreting S7 Result Codes on page 101 for a description of S7 results returned by address point interpolation. Street Address is matched to a street address position. ZIP Address is matched to a ZIP Code centroid or point ZIP centroid position. Each of the S codes is defined below. The second position in the code reflects the positional accuracy of the resulting point for the geocoded record, as indicated below. S1 single match, point located at ZIP Code centroid. This is the same quality match as a Z1 result. S2 single match, point located at ZIP + 2 centroid. This is the same quality match as a Z2 result. S3 single match, point located at ZIP + 4. This is the same quality match as a Z3 result. S4 single match, point located at a street centroid. S5 single match, point located at a street address position. Because only street segment data is available, the interpolation is not as accurate as an S7 return. See also Interpreting S5 Result Codes on page 101. S6 single match, point located at point ZIP centroid. See also Interpreting S6 Result Codes on page 101. This is the same quality match as a Z6 result. S7 single match, located at an interpolated point along a street segment. Both a point dictionary and a street segment dictionary must be available. Because known point data is available, the S7 interpolation is more accurate than an S5 result. See Interpreting S7 Result Codes on page 101. S8 single match, point located at either the single point associated with an address point candidate or at an address point candidate that shares the same house number. No interpolation is required. See also Interpreting S8 Result Codes on page 101. SX single match, point located at street intersection. S0 single match, no coordinates available (very rare occurrence). MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 99

100 Result Codes SC Single close match where the original point has been moved a specified distance (usually along a perpendicular line) toward or away from the associated street segment. This result code can be returned only when both a point dictionary and a street segment dictionary are available and when the centerline offset feature is used. See the table of Geocoding Result Codes Related to Census Block Information for more information on the S Return Codes. For more information on how a close match is determined, see Match Settings and Strategies. See the following topics: Interpreting Complete S and M Result Codes Interpreting S8 Result Codes Interpreting S7 Result Codes Interpreting S6 Result Codes Interpreting S5 Result Codes S and Z Result Codes: What is the Difference? Interpreting Complete S and M Result Codes For S category result codes, eight additional characters describe how closely the address in your table matches an address in the Address Dictionary. The characters appear in the order listed in the following table. Any non-matched components are represented by a dash. Result Code Component Description Example H House Number 110 P Street Prefix North N Street Name Fletcher T Street Type Place S Street Suffix SE C City Name Boulder Z ZIP Code A or U Address Dictionary or User Dictionary A MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 100

101 Result Codes For example, the result code S5- -N-SCZA is for a single close match that matched the street name, street suffix direction, city and ZIP Code exactly, but could not match the house number, street prefix direction, or the street type. The match came from the MapMarker Address Dictionary. This record would be geocoded to the street address position of the match candidate. M category result codes follow the same pattern, and are described in Best Match From Multiple Candidates (M category) on page 102. Interpreting S8 Result Codes S8 results are matched to either the single point associated with an address point candidate, or to an address point candidate that shares the same house number. An S8 result can return a complete 15-character Census Block ID. An S8 result indicates that the address candidate is a point. No interpolation is required, so S8 result codes are returned regardless of whether address point interpolation is enabled. Interpreting S7 Result Codes S7 results are matched to an interpolated point along the candidate s street segment. An S7 result can return a complete 15-character Census Block ID. You must enable address point interpolation to generate S7 result codes. Both a point dictionary and a street segment dictionary must be available. An S7 candidate is not located exactly at a known point. However, because both point and segment data is available, the interpolation along the street segment can be very accurate. The geocoded candidate location is interpolated based on the nearest point candidates on the street segment. By using known address reference points on the street segment, the S7 interpolated point can be more accurate than an S5 result. Interpreting S6 Result Codes An S6 code is returned from geocoding when the candidate is matched to a point ZIP centroid. A point ZIP is a 5-digit ZIP Code that represents unique ZIPs such as a single site, building, or organization. Point ZIPs do not cover an area, so they are shown as dots on a map rather than polygons, and have no geographic extent defined in terms of street segments. Because these points show actual locations, a different result code is used to distinguish them from other ZIP Centroid matches. Interpreting S5 Result Codes S5 results are matched to an interpolated point along a street segment. This can return a complete 15-character Census Block ID. An S5 result is based on a street segment dictionary only. This interpolation is not a accurate as an S7 result, which can use point data to interpolate more accurately. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 101

102 Result Codes If you receive an S5 match for a record that was geocoded to an unexpected place, analyze the result code to determine why. This situation can occur during a geocoding pass where you did not require an exact match on house number, street name, and/or ZIP Code. When MapMarker attempts to geocode the record with those settings, it searches larger areas than it would if the conditions were stricter. Under those conditions, it is possible to match the record to a distant address that has a similar name. For example, a typical result might look like this: S5-P--S--A. The missing components in the result code are represented by dashes. Even though MapMarker returned an S5 (it found a single match to a street address), it did not match the house number (H), street name (N), street type (T), city (C), or ZIP Code (Z). To minimize the matches that geocode to incorrect locations, geocode your table with stricter matching conditions. For the greatest matching accuracy, you can use CASS geocoding as explained in CASS Geocoding. Alternatively, you can use a point level dictionary to generate highly-accurate S8 single-point geocode matches. Note: You cannot use point dictionaries (or any user dictionary) in combination with CASS geocoding. S and Z Result Codes: What is the Difference? An S3 match is defined as a single close match with the point located at the ZIP + 4 centroid. The Z3 match is also geocoded to the ZIP + 4 centroid. The S3 and Z3 result codes indicate the identical postal centroid. There is no difference in the accuracy of S3 and Z3 matches. The only difference is how MapMarker arrives at the results. For the S3 record, MapMarker found a street address that matches, but the match record did not contain any street geometry information. MapMarker is, therefore, unable to interpolate where along the segment to place the record. The best it can do is to geocode to the ZIP + 4 centroid. A Z3 match is a direct match to the ZIP + 4 centroid. MapMarker could not find a street address match for one of several reasons: 1) you chose to geocode to the postal level; 2) there was no close street level match and you chose postal fallback; or 3) the address is a P.O. Box or rural route. Similarly, S2/Z2 (ZIP + 2 matches) and S1/Z1 (5-digit ZIP Code matches) indicate the identical postal centroids. There is no difference in the accuracy of these S and Z matches. Best Match From Multiple Candidates (M category) Matches in the M category indicate that there is more than one match candidate for the record and MapMarker has chosen the best one of those candidates. This category is used when you select Accept First, Pick Street Address over ZIP + 4, or Pick ZIP + 4 over Street Address in the Multiple Match tab and MapMarker finds more than one strong match candidate. As in the S category, the second position in the code of M category matches the positional accuracy of the resulting point object. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 102

103 Result Codes Note: M category matches can be returned for the Desktop Application only. M1 multiple matches, point located at ZIP Code centroid M2 multiple matches, point located at ZIP + 2 centroid M3 multiple matches, point located at ZIP + 4 centroid M4 multiple matches, point located at the center of a shape point path (shape points define the shape of the street polyline) M5 multiple matches, point located at a street address position (highest accuracy available) M6 multiple matches, point located at point ZIP location MX multiple matches, point located at street intersection M0 multiple matches, no coordinates available See A Closer Look at Multiple Matches on page 95. Postal Centroid Matches (Z category) Matches in the Z category indicate that no street match was made, either: 1) because there is no close match and you allowed MapMarker to fall back to ZIP Centroid; 2) the address is a P.O. Box or rural address; or 3) you set MapMarker to match to ZIP Centroids. The resulting point is located at the ZIP Code centroid with five possible accuracy levels. Z1 ZIP Code (5-digit) centroid match Z2 ZIP + 2 centroid match Z3 ZIP + 4 centroid match (highest accuracy available for Z matches) Z0 ZIP Code match, no coordinates available (very rare) Z6 ZIP Code centroid match for point ZIP A Z6 code is returned when the candidate is matched to a point ZIP centroid. Point ZIPs are 5-digit ZIP Codes that are points on a map rather than a polygon. Point ZIPs include unique ZIPs (single site, building, or organization). Instead of returning a Z1 result code, the Z6 code indicates that these special ZIPs are actual point locations, not an area. Geographic Matches (G category) Matches in the G category indicate that a match was made at the state, county, or city level. G1 State match, point located at the state centroid. G2 County match, point located at the county centroid. G3 City match, point located at the city centroid. A number of prominent U.S cities can be matched even if no other information is provided. For example, if you provide Chicago (city) but no state, the record is matched to Chicago, IL. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 103

104 Result Codes Reverse Geocoded Matches (R category) Candidates return a R result codes, indicating that records was matched by reverse geocoding. The first three characters of the R result code indicate the type of match found. R geocode results include an additional letter to indicate the dictionary from which the match was made. This is always an A, indicating address dictionary; reverse geocoding is supported by the address dictionary only (not user dictionaries). Note: Reverse geocoding is not supported in the Desktop application. Therefore, geocoded candidates in the Desktop application will not return R result codes. Reverse geocoding is supported in the Developer (Server) edition and at the engine level. See the MapMarker USA Developer Guide for more information on reverse geocoding. Reverse geocoding result codes are as follows: RS8A Point level match. Candidate returned from a point dictionary (Centrus Points, TomTom Points, NAVTEQ Point Addressing, or ). RS5A Street address match. Candidate returned from address dictionary. RS4A Street centroid match). Candidate returned from address dictionary. Non-match Codes (N category) The following result codes indicate no match was made: N No close match. These records can be re-geocoded interactively or during subsequent automatic passes under different matching conditions. NX No close match for street intersections. ND MapMarker could not find the Address Dictionary for the given ZIP Code or city/state. These records can be re-generated once the Address Dictionary is available. An ND code can also appear in the fields of Zip + 4 output columns. For example, MapMarker can return ND. In this case, the ND code is ZIP + 4 Codes associated with nondelivery areas such as vacant lots or other areas to which the US Postal Service does not deliver mail. NG The user marks these records during interactive geocoding as non-geocodable. MapMarker does not attempt to match these records again until the code is removed. Using the Georesult Dialog After you geocode a table (automatic or interactive), successfully geocoded addresses will have a have a result codes, match codes, and location codes in the corresponding output table columns. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 104

105 Result Codes Displaying Result Codes and Matching Details To view detailed information on a the result code and matching details, double-click the candidate s result code in the Georesult column of the output table. The following represents a portion of an output table (only the Georesult, Matchcode, and Locationcode columns are illustrated). The S8HP-TSCZA result code was produced by geocoding the input address: 52 Lake Paradis Rd, Monson MA, You can double-click on the S8HP-TSCZA result code to display the GeoResult Code tab on the Status Code dialog. This dialog provides detailed information on the selected record, including the address, ZIP Code, result code, match type, and match details for each address component. See Understanding Result Codes on page 98 for an explanation and descriptions of result codes. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 105

106 Result Codes Note: If you leave the Georesult dialog open, you can continue to double-click on result codes in your table and the detailed information for the selected record will appear. Select the Match Code or Location Code tabs to see information on the returned Match codes and Location codes. Or you can double-click on the candidate s Matchcode, or Locationcode in the output table to see that information. See Displaying Match Code Details. Displaying Match Code Details You can double-click a candidate s match code in the Matchcode column of an output table. See Displaying Result Codes and Matching Details on page 105 for an example that illustrates an output table with the Georesult, Matchcode, and Locationcode columns. For example, you can double-click the A88 code in the Matchcode column of an output table. The dialog shows the Match code with details on the meaning of the code and how the code was generated. The match description indicates that the candidate was matched to an alias or an alternate record in the USPS database. The A88 match code and the checked boxes indicate that the ZIP+4 AND Street Name were changed to make the match (the input Lake Paradise Rd was changed to Paradise Lake Rd on output). For complete information on the returned match codes, see Match Codes on page 267. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 106

107 Result Codes Displaying Location Code Details You can double-click a candidate s location code in the Locationcode column of an output table. See Displaying Result Codes and Matching Details on page 105 for an example that illustrates an output table with the Georesult, Matchcode, and Locationcode columns. For example, you can double-click an AP02 code in the Locationcode column of an output table. The dialog shows the Location code with a brief description of the code meaning. The AP02 location code and description indicate that the candidate is a parcel/point centroid. For complete information on the returned location codes, see Location Codes on page 274. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 107

108 6 6 Specialized Geocoding Features This chapter covers a number of specialized MapMarker features, including CASS processing, DPV, LACS Link, ZIP centroid geocoding, Quick Geocoding, Quick Find, Locate Airport, Locate Highway Exit, batch geocoding, and table attribution. In this chapter: CASS Geocoding 109 LACS Link 112 DPV 115 Suite Link 124 Returning Abbreviated Addresses 125 Returning Abbreviated City Names 126 Geocoding Dual Addresses 127 Geocoding dbase Files 129 Using Quick Geocode 129 Finding Address with Quick Find 130 Finding Airports with Locate Airport 140 Finding Highway Exits with Locate Highway Exit 142 Batch Geocoding 142 Table Attribution with MapMarker 147

109 Specialized Geocoding Features CASS Geocoding The Coding Accuracy Support System (CASS ) is the USPS certification process for ZIP + 4 matching software by which a table of mailing addresses is standardized to meet USPS requirements for bulk mailing discounts. MapMarker standardizes addresses under strict matching conditions set by the USPS while it geocodes your records. Note: You cannot geocode your records with a user dictionary during CASS geocoding or when using single-line address processing. To geocode your data to CASS standards and obtain the bulk mailing discount, a number of output columns are required, and you must produce a CASS report. You must also have the current revision of the MapMarker Address Dictionary available to comply with CASS address standardization. MapMarker ships regular data updates to comply with CASS requirements and DPV. The CASS expiration dates for your version of MapMarker USA are covered in your product Release Notes. DPV is closely tied to the currentness of the CASS data. The CASS ZIP +4 data is synchronized with DPV updates to ensure that both are valid for the full 105- day period of the quarter. Note: Beginning with Cycle N (MapMarker USA 24), Suite Link is required by the USPS for CASS reporting. See the following topics: CASS Report Required Fields CASS Report Optional Fields Geocoding in CASS Mode MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 109

110 Specialized Geocoding Features The following columns are required for generating CASS report. For a complete list of output columns (including type and width requirements) see Output Column Type/Width Requirements. CASS Report Required Fields Firm Address Address2 City State ZIP ZIP + 4 URB (This field is used to store urbanization codes for Puerto Rican addresses. You must have this field even if you do not have Puerto Rican addresses.) Delivery Point Check Digit LACS Carr. Route DefaultFlag PMB PMB Range EWS Flag RecordType DPV ConfCode DPV Cmra DPV falsepos DPV FtNote1 DPV FtNote2 DPV FtNote3 DPV Vacant DPV NoStat LACS Indicator LACS Link Code SuiteLink Code MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 110

111 Specialized Geocoding Features CASS Report Optional Fields Latitude Float or Decimal (10,6) Longitude Float or Decimal (11,6) Census Character(15) EWS Flag Character(1) County Geocoding in CASS Mode To geocode in CASS mode, do the following: 1. Start MapMarker. 2. Open the table you want to geocode. Proceed through the Select Column dialogs. 3. On the Geocode dialog box, select the Match Settings tab. 4. In the Match Settings group, select the CASS Match Mode. 5. Select the CASS option that you want to use. 6. To produce a U.S. Postal Service Form 3553 CASS Report, select the Produce a CASS Report check box. You are prompted for a name and location for the report at the Save CASS Report As dialog. 7. Click Geocode to begin geocoding. MapMarker geocodes your data while CASS processing and provides a printed report of the address standardization operation. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 111

112 Specialized Geocoding Features You can geocode using the CASS standards for any table, local or remote, without producing a report or conforming closely to the output columns. In this case, you do not qualify for the bulk mailing discount, but you are still geocoding your records to stricter matching standards. LACS Link LACS Link is a data product provided by the USPS that enables addresses that have been converted because of municipality changes or 911 emergency systems to be linked with their updated addresses. The LACS Link database provided by the USPS contains a nationwide list of converted addresses. The LACS Link technology and data have been added into MapMarker for use when you geocode in CASS mode. LACS Link processing enables you to check your addresses against the LACS Link database, and receive the converted address for any input address that has been converted. Most address conversions are the result of changes by the local governments that convert rural style addresses to street-style addresses for 911 conversions. Other addresses are converted because of changes to street names or P.O. Box renumbering. Although you run LACS Link when you do CASS mode geocoding, it is a separate process from geocoding. LACS Link is an address standardization tool only. Records that undergo LACS Link processing are not geocoded. The converted address is returned in the candidate list, but no coordinates are returned with it. These records have an S0 result code. To geocode the converted addresses, you must do a second geocode pass on the table. LACS Link processing for an input address takes place under these circumstances: Input address is matched to a record in the Address Dictionary that has a LACS indicator set to L. Input address is matched to a record in the Address Dictionary that is a Rural Route default. Input address does not match a record in the Address Dictionary. See the following topics: Using LACS Link Street Directionals with DPV DPV and LACS Link Usage Guidelines and Requirements Using LACS Link To use LACS Link, do the following: 1. If you have not done so already, add the required CASS columns to the table that you want to geocode. See CASS Geocoding on page 109 for information on the columns. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 112

113 Specialized Geocoding Features 2. Start MapMarker. 3. Open the table you want to geocode. Proceed through the Select Column dialogs. When selecting output columns, make sure that you click Show DPV and LACSLink Columns. This displays the CASS-related columns. For details of the LACS Link Indicator and LACS Link Code columns, see LACS Link Output Columns. 4. Once you have provided all the information in the Select output columns from your table, click Finish. You are then returned to the Geocode dialog box. 5. Select the Match Settings tab. In that dialog click Use CASS Mode and in the CASS options group click Use LACSLink. 6. Click Geocode to begin geocoding. Note: LACS Link processing does not require the creation of a CASS report. Output addresses are still provided without a report being created. LACS Link Output Columns There are two LACS Link output columns that you can add to your table before you geocode, although LACS Link processing still continues if you do not have the columns. These columns contain information about the LACS Link output. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 113

114 Specialized Geocoding Features The LACS Link indicator column (char 1) shows whether the input address was converted. The LACS Link Code column (char 2) includes information about the output. These two columns are read as a pair. The paired LACS Link output columns and their possible values are described in the following LACS Link Output Columns table. LACS Link Output Columns LACS Link Indicator char(1) LACS Link Code char(2) Description Y A Indicates that the input address was a converted address, and the converted address was returned as output. Y 09 Indicates that the input address was a converted address, but that the address was too imprecise for the LACS Link converted address to be returned. The rest of the candidate information is returned as if LACS Link was not used. S 92 Indicates that the input address failed initially, but that a converted address was returned when secondary address information, such as the unit, was dropped. F null Indicates a false positive. When a false positive occurs, LACS Link processing is disabled. No further LACS Link processing is allowed until it is re-enabled. No CASS output information is returned (that is, ZIP + 4, carrier route, delivery point). The input address is returned as if there was no match to the LACS Link database. N 00 Indicates that no converted address was found for the input address. The input address is processed normally, but there is no converted output address. N 14 Indicates that LACS Link processing proceeded as if a converted address would be returned, but that an output address could not be built. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 114

115 Specialized Geocoding Features Note: To protect the security of the LACS Link data, the U.S. Postal Service requires that Pitney Bowes implement a stop processing sequence to shut off LACS Link if a possible misuse of the LACS Link data is detected. If you incur a usage violation while geocoding with LACS Link processing turned on, LACS Link is automatically shut off. For more information on LACS Link security guidelines and re-enabling LACS Link after a usage violation, see DPV and LACS Link Usage Guidelines and Requirements on page 121 DPV The DPV Product technology available from the USPS provides the highest level of identifying known address records. When used in conjunction with CASS geocoding in MapMarker, DPV enables you to identify whether an address is a known USPS delivery point before your mailing leaves the premises. Conversely, you are also able to identify those addresses that are potentially undeliverable-as-addressed because of faulty address information. When you geocode in DPV mode, MapMarker checks each geocoded address against the DPV database to identify whether the address is a known delivery point. The DPV database consists of over 165 million USPS delivery points, and is made available by the USPS for this specific use as part of the DPV option. Note: MapMarker installations shipped outside of the U.S. do not include DPV data. If the installer does not find the DPV data, it can not be chosen for installation. See the following topics: Using DPV Street Directionals with DPV Enhanced ZIP + 4 and DPV Requirement DPV Data and CASS DPV Output Columns DPV and LACS Link Usage Guidelines and Requirements Using DPV DPV is used as part of the CASS process to ensure that geocoded addresses are identified as known USPS delivery points. Geocoding with DPV is available only when you are running in CASS mode, and requires extra columns in your table to hold the DPV output. To use DPV, do the following: 1. If you have not done so already, add the required CASS columns to the table that you want to geocode. See CASS Geocoding on page 109 for information on the columns. 2. Start MapMarker. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 115

116 Specialized Geocoding Features 3. Open the table you want to geocode. Proceed through the Select Column dialogs. When selecting output columns, make sure that you click Show DPV and LACSLink Columns. This displays the CASS-related columns. For details of the DPV -related output columns, see DPV Output Columns on page Once you have provided all the information in the Select output columns from your table, click Finish. You are then returned to the Geocode dialog box. 5. Select the Match Settings tab. In that dialog click Use CASS Mode to activate the CASS-related check boxes. In the CASS options group click Use DPV mode. 6. Click Geocode to begin geocoding. Street Directionals with DPV CASS rules mandate that street directionals are handled differently when geocoding with DPV. When a candidate is the only DPV-confirmed candidate and it matches the input address except for the directional, MapMarker makes this candidate a close match. Candidates that previously did not match return as the single close match because of this change. For example, when the following address is geocoded using DPV: th Ave S, Nashville TN 37208, the address is confirmed and matched to the following output address: th Ave N (DPV confirmed) Nashville TN This change does not apply when there is more than one DPV-confirmed candidate in the output, or if the output contains no DPV-confirmed candidates. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 116

117 Specialized Geocoding Features Enhanced ZIP + 4 and DPV Requirement If you are using DPV mode, and the primary number of the address does not DPV confirm (with Y, S, or D confirmation code as described in DPV Column Values on page 118), then the USPS requires that MapMarker returns a ZIP Code and carrier route only for mailing-related information. That is, if there is no DPV confirmation, MapMarker will not return the ZIP + 4, Delivery Point, Check Digit, RecordType, or DefaultFlag. DPV Data and CASS MapMarker ships regular data updates to comply with CASS requirements. Because the operation of DPV is closely tied to the currentness of the CASS data, the ZIP + 4 data is synchronized with DPV updates to ensure that both are valid for the full 105-day period of the quarter. If DPV expired on your system, MapMarker still functions normally except that you cannot use DPV and cannot create a CASS report. However, you can still geocode with CASS rules. To determine the DPV expiration on your installation, select Help > About from the MapMarker desktop application. DPV Output Columns DPV generates information for each geocoded address during the geocoding process. Your output table must include several columns to hold this information. These columns contain information specific to DPV, as well as a number of USPS footnote codes that give more information about how the address was identified. The DPV output columns and possible values are described in the following DPV Column Values table. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 117

118 Specialized Geocoding Features DPV Column Values Column Name type (width) DPV ConfCode char (1) Description The DPV confirmation code for the geocoded address. The value of ConfCode determines the value of Cmra and falsepos. Values: N Delivery Point not valid. Y Delivery Point valid for primary and valid for secondary, if secondary input is present. S Valid primary. Secondary (such as unit number) is present but not confirmed. For rural route, primary is present but not confirmed. D Address is incomplete (highrise with no unit number, or rural route with no box number). empty No value returned. This happens when the ZIP + 4 code generates an ND non-match code, for example, ND. The Commercial Mail Receiving Agency (CMRA) is also empty in this case. In CASS processing, ZIP + 4 codes that are NDs are not returned. For details on non-match codes, see Non-match Codes (N category) on page 104. DPV Cmra char (1) Indicates whether the geocoded address belongs to a (Commercial Mail Receiving Agencies (CMRA). Values: Y CMRA was found. N CMRA was not found. blank Blank character (a space) returned as the value. If the ConfCode returns an N, the CMRA property returns a blank character as the value. Since the address does not exist in the DPV database, there is no reason to check for a CMRA. This occurs in general delivery matches. empty No value returned. This happens in the following cases: If the ConfCode does not return a value, the CMRA does not return a value. This occurs when the ZIP + 4 code is an ND. Military matches. Unique ZIP Code matches. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 118

119 Specialized Geocoding Features DPV Column Values Column Name type (width) DPV falsepos char (1) DPV Vacant DPV NoStat LACSLink Indicator If true, DPV has detected a condition in which the geocoded address appears to be artificially generated and not a legitimately obtained address. DPV shuts down immediately in this instance. Values: Y DPV has detected that an artificially generated address was geocoded. DPV shuts down immediately. N The address is not an artificially generated address. blank Blank character (a space) returned as the value. If the ConfCode returns a Y, S, or D, the falsepos property returns a blank character as the value. Since the address exists in the DPV database, there is no reason to check for a false positive. Indicates if a location is vacant. Values: Y The address is vacant. N The address is not vacant. Blank DPV is not loaded or DPV did not confirm (so vacancy is irrelevant). Indicates that the address is not receiving delivery and the address is not counted as a possible delivery. These addresses are not receiving delivery for one or more of the following reasons: Delivery has not been established. The customer receives mail as part of a drop. The address is no longer a possible delivery because the carrier destroys or returns all of the mail. Values: Description Y The address was valid for computerized delivery sequence (CDS) pre-processing. N The address not valid for CDS. Blank The address is not presented to No Stat table or DPV data is not loaded. Indicates whether the input address was converted. This and the LACSLink Code information are read as a pair. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 119

120 Specialized Geocoding Features DPV Column Values Column Name type (width) LACSLink Code SuiteLink Code DPV FtNote1 char (2) DPV FtNote2 char (2) DPV FtNote3 char (2) Includes information about the output. Indicates whether a Suite Link lookup or match was made. Values: Description A SuiteLink match. Secondary information exists and was assigned to this record as a result of SuiteLink processing. 00 SuiteLink no match. Lookup attempted but no matching record was found. blank SuiteLink lookup was not attempted because one of the following was true: The address was not a highrise default according to CASS. The address did not contain a firm. Field that may be populated with a standard USPS footnote code. Description of the codes follow this table. Field that may be populated with a standard USPS footnote code. Description of the codes follow this table. Field that may be populated with a standard USPS footnote code. Description of the codes follow this table. Footnote Codes The following DPV footnote codes may be output for match candidates: AA Input address matched to the ZIP + 4 file. A1 Input address not matched to the ZIP + 4 file. BB Input address matched to DPV (all components). CC Input address primary number matched to DPV but secondary number not matched (present but invalid). F1 Input address matched to a military address. G1 Input address matched to a general delivery address. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 120

121 Specialized Geocoding Features N1 Input address primary number matched to DPV but highrise address missing secondary number. M1 Input address primary number missing. M3 Input address primary number invalid. P1 Input address missing PO, RR, or HC box number. P3 Input address PO, RR, or HC Box number invalid. RR Input address matched to CMRA and PMB designator present (PMB123 or #123). R1 Input address matched to CMRA but PMB designator not present (PMB 123 or #123). U1 Input address matched to a unique ZIP Code. DPV and LACS Link Usage Guidelines and Requirements The DPV feature has specific requirements related to the CASS process to ensure the validity of the data, its security, and to guard against improper use of the feature. This section explains the mechanisms MapMarker has in place to meet these requirements. False-positive addresses, are addressees the USPS monitors to ensure users are not attempting to create a mailing list from the DPV or LACS Link data. To protect the security of the DPV data, the U.S. Postal Service requires that Pitney Bowes implement a stop processing sequence to shut off DPV if a possible misuse of the DPV data is detected. This is designed to guard against users who are attempting to create address lists with the data, rather than do true address validation. Note: Per the USPS regulations, Pitney Bowes must contact the USPS with the organization s name and address for every false-positive address encountered. If multiple incidents of artificial address detection occurs, the USPS may ask Pitney Bowes to suspend a customer s DPV or LACS Link processing capability. If you encounter a false-positive, you will receive a message. Processing continues to the end of your job, but DPV or LACS Link processing is not available. DPV or LACS Link processing is not available for subsequent jobs until you have reported the false-positive address encounter to Pitney Bowes and have received a new security key. Messages similar to the following appears when you encounter a false-positive address: For DPV DPV usage has been disabled because of a hit to a DPV false positive seed record. Please contact Pitney Bowes Technical Support to re-enable the DPV feature. For LACS Link LACS Link feature has been disabled because of a hit to a LACS Link false positive seed record. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 121

122 Specialized Geocoding Features See the following topics: Creating the False Positive Report for DPV or LACS Link Submitting a False Positive Report and Obtaining New Security Key Creating the False Positive Report for DPV or LACS Link If you generated a false positive record for DPV or LACS Link you must create a falsepositive file that contains the Header Record and Detail Record information. You must provide this file to obtain a new security file from the Pitney Bowes Web site or from technical support. The following tables contain the layout of the header and detail records of the false-positive files for DPV and LACS Link. The header record contains the mailer information from the Mailer Parameter Record and statistics gathered by the application. The detail record contains false-positive record information. False Positive Table Header Records Position Length Description Format Company Name alphanumeric Address line alphanumeric City name alphanumeric State abbreviation alphabetic Digit ZIP Code numeric Total records DPV LACSLInk processed Total records DPV LACSLInk matched percent match rate to DPV numeric numeric numeric Found in DPV false positive header records only percent match rate to ZIP +4 numeric Found in DPV false positive header records only. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 122

123 Specialized Geocoding Features False Positive Table Header Records (Continued) Position Length Description Format number of ZIP Codes on file numeric Found in DPV false positive header records only Number of false positives numeric Found in DPV false positive header records only. False Positive Detail Records Position Length Description Format Street directional alphanumeric Street name alphanumeric Street suffix abbreviation alphanumeric Street postdirectional alphanumeric Address primary number alphanumeric Address secondary abbreviation alphanumeric Address secondary number numeric Matched ZIP Code numeric Matched ZIP Plus 4 numeric Filler Submitting a False Positive Report and Obtaining New Security Key Use the same procedure to report false-positive address matches and obtain a new security key for both DPV and LACS Link. You must provide the false-positive report file to Pitney Bowes to obtain a replacement security key. If you do generate a DPV and LACS Link false positive address, contact Pitney Bowes Technical Support. Have your original DPV and LACS security keys ready when you contact Technical Support. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 123

124 Specialized Geocoding Features Suite Link Suite Link is the USPS business name database that provides suite numbers for businesses located in high-rise buildings. This allows delivery sequencing where it would not otherwise be available. Suite Link is provided free of charge but you must request this data from your customer representative. No additional licensing is required. Note: Beginning with Cycle N (MapMarker USA 24), Suite Link is required by the USPS for CASS reporting. Using Suite Link Suite Link is used as part of the CASS process to return suite numbers for businesses even if the input address did not provide this information. Suite Link results are available as a user-selected option on the Match Settings dialog. Suite information is returned as part of the output Address field. Suite Link data is an optional dataset. This dataset is provided on a separate DVD and is copied from the media by the user. There is no licensing required, but you must contact your sales representative to acquire Suite Link. Copy the Suite Link data into the Data directory (typically <install>/mapmarker_usa_v29_data). To use Suite Link, do the following: 1. If you have not done so already, add the required output columns to the table that you want to geocode. See CASS Geocoding on page 109 for information on the columns. 2. Open the table you want to geocode. Proceed through the Select Column dialogs. 3. Once you have provided all the information in the Select output columns from your table, click Finish. You are then returned to the Geocode dialog box. 4. In the Geocode dialog box, make selections for the Geocode Precision, Types of Rows to Geocode, and Range to Geocode. 5. Select the Match Settings tab. In that dialog click Use SuiteLink. Note that this option is available even if Use CASS Mode is not selected. Make your other selections in the Match Settings dialog. 6. Click Geocode to begin geocoding. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 124

125 Specialized Geocoding Features The following table shows examples of input addresses and the Suite Link returns: Suite Link Examples Input Firmname Input Address Suite Link Output Address Chrtr Home Mrtg 171 Park Ave #3 171 Park Ave Ste 2 Rockaway Bldg 1578 Sussex Tpke # Susses Tpke Bldg 1 Capital EAP Limited 650 Warren St #4 650 Warren St Ste 4 American Inst 80 Maiden Ln # Maiden Ln Rm 221 Joliet Medical Limited 2100 Glenwood Ave 2100 Glenwood Ave Ste 100 If the input address has incorrect suite/location information, Suite Link will return the corrected information. For example, input of #3 can be corrected to Ste 2. If the input address does not specify a street but the Suite Link dataset includes suite information for the business, then the suite is added to the output address. Returning Abbreviated Addresses MapMarker USA 29 can return an abbreviated alias address (maximum of 30 characters) if the standardized base input address exceeds 30 characters. Abbreviated address returns are available as a user-selected option on the Match Settings dialog. This information is returned in the standard Address1 output field. You do not have to be currently licensed for CASS to take advantage of the Abbreviated Address option. To get abbreviated address on output, do the following: 1. If you have not done so already, add the required output columns to the table that you want to geocode. See CASS Geocoding on page 109 for information on the columns. 2. Open the table you want to geocode. Proceed through the Select Column dialogs. 3. Once you have provided all the information in the Select output columns from your table, click Finish. You are then returned to the Geocode dialog box. 4. In the Geocode dialog box, make selections for the Geocode Precision, Types of Rows to Geocode, and Range to Geocode. 5. Select the Match Settings tab. In that dialog click Return Short Address. Note that this option is available even if Use CASS Mode is not selected. Make your other selections in the Match Settings dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 125

126 Specialized Geocoding Features 6. Click Geocode to begin geocoding. The following examples illustrate several standardized base addresses that exceed 30 characters and the corresponding abbreviated returned address. The bold text shows the standardized base address and the corresponding abbreviated address. Abbreviated Addresses Standardized Base Address Input 100 Tyngsborough Business Pk Dr Unit Tyngsboro MA Woodsville Marshall Corner Rd APT A Hopewell NJ Rev S Howard Woodson Jr Way 31 Trenton NJ Abbreviated Address Output 100 Business Park Dr Unit 1 Tyngsboro MA Mrshl Crnr Wods Rd Apt A Hopewell NJ Howard Woodson Way Trenton NJ Returning Abbreviated City Names MapMarker USA 29 can return an abbreviated city name (maximum of 13 characters) for any valid city name (regardless of length). Abbreviated city name returned are available as a user-selected option on the Match Settings dialog. This information is returned in the standard City output field. You do not have to be licensed for CASS to take advantage of the Abbreviated Address option. To get abbreviated city names on output, do the following: 1. If you have not done so already, add the required output columns to the table that you want to geocode. See CASS Geocoding on page 109 for information on the columns. 2. Open the table you want to geocode. Proceed through the Select Column dialogs. 3. Once you have provided all the information in the Select output columns from your table, click Finish. You are then returned to the Geocode dialog box. 4. In the Geocode dialog box, make selections for the Geocode Precision, Types of Rows to Geocode, and Range to Geocode. 5. Select the Match Settings tab. In that dialog click Return Short City Name. Note that this option is available even if Use CASS Mode is not selected. Make your other selections in the Match Settings dialog. 6. Click Geocode to begin geocoding. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 126

127 Specialized Geocoding Features The following examples illustrate several long input city names (exceeding 13 characters) and the corresponding abbreviated city name returned. The bold text shows the long city name (or non-mailing city name) and the corresponding abbreviated city name. Abbreviated City Name City Name Input 7311 Black Oak Ln Yosemite National Park CA Pioneer Rd Mangonia Park FL (non-recognized city name) 252 N Wickiup Rd Apache Junction, AZ Rancho Cucamonga, CA Smithwheel Rd, Old Orchard Beach, ME Abbreviated City Name Output 7311 Black Oak Ln Yosemite Ntpk CA PIONEER RD West Palm Bch FL (abbreviated name associated with the valid city name West Palm Beach) 252 N Wickiup Rd Apache JCT, AZ Rch Cucamonga, CA Smithwheel Rd, Old Orchd Bch, ME Geocoding Dual Addresses A dual address is an address that contains both a street address, and a P.O. Box or General Delivery. These parts may appear on two lines, or on one line. Two-Line Dual Addresses A two-line dual address might appear like this on an envelope: 1 MAIN STREET PO BOX 123 In a two-line dual address, the line that appears directly above the last-line information in the address is the intended delivery address. In the two-line address example above, PO BOX 123 is the intended delivery address. For MapMarker input purposes, PO BOX 123 is the Address1 input field and 1 MAIN STREET is the Address2 input field. When you geocode the table, a two-line dual address is matched to the address in the Address1 field if both addresses produce a close match. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 127

128 Specialized Geocoding Features One-Line Dual Addresses A one-line dual address might appear like this: 1 MAIN STREET PO BOX 123 In CASS mode, for one-line dual addresses, MapMarker chooses a single close match based on the following priority, if both addresses produce a close match: P.O. Box Street Rural Route General Delivery When you geocode a table in CASS mode, the address that is not used for the single close match is output to the Address2 field for both types of dual addresses. In non-cass geocoding, the street address is always preferred if both addresses produce close matches. Geocoding Remote Tables MapMarker supports ODBC tables in Microsoft Access, Oracle, and SQL Server formats. See your MapMarker release notes for version-specific support information. If you are geocoding your ODBC table, you or your database administrator must first add the fields for GeoResult, Latitude, and Longitude. A georesult column is highly recommended and coordinate columns are recommended. If you plan for MapMarker to write additional address information to your table, prepare columns for them as well. To access your remote database: 1. Choose File > Open ODBC Table to display the Select Data Source dialog. (If you set File > Open Startup Options for ODBC Tables from the System Preferences dialog, the Select Data Source dialog appears automatically when you start MapMarker. 2. From the Select Data Source dialog, click the Machine Data Source tab. 3. Choose your data source. Your data source is the location of the specified database. For example, CUSTOMER could be the name of the data source that provides access to one or more Oracle tables located in a specified directory. Once connected to the CUSTOMER data source, you could access information from any Oracle table associated with that data source. 4. Sign on to your data source in the usual way. This procedure differs depending on what type of ODBC table you are using. 5. From the Select Table dialog, choose the table you want to access. Each of the tables owned by you or accessible to you are displayed. Keep in mind that you cannot open any other tables while you have an ODBC table open. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 128

129 Specialized Geocoding Features 6. Proceed with geocoding as you would with any other MapMarker table, as described in Geocoding Your Table Automatically on page 48. For more detailed information, see Geocoding Remote Tables on page 157. Geocoding dbase Files MapMarker reads dbase format (DBF) as well as MapInfo native format (TAB) files, enabling you to turn any table of records into geographic objects. This section explains some things to keep in mind when geocoding DBF files. MapMarker creates a TAB file automatically when you open a DBF file. If you open the DBF file a second time, a dialog appears stating that a TAB file already exists. Select Yes to replace it. Since MapMarker automatically creates a TAB file for any DBF file you open, all of the options available to TAB files apply to DBF files. Among them, MapMarker adds coordinate and result columns and creates points for your table automatically. MapMarker does not display memo fields included with DBF files. The fields are not changed in any way by MapMarker. MapMarker does not maintain indexes for DBF files. If you write to an indexed field during geocoding, the table must be re-indexed outside of MapMarker if you wish to maintain the index. For more detailed information, see Geocoding Remote Tables on page 157. Geocoding Delimited, CSV, and SHP Files MapMarker reads and writes delimited text files, CSV, TXT, and DBF files. After opening these files, you can use a Text File wizard to set properties for the input file. MapMarker can also export files to ESRI Shapefile (SHP) format. See the following topics in Chapter 2 Geocoding with MapMarker: Opening a Table or Text File. Defining Properties of Delimited Text Files Exporting to Shapefiles Using Quick Geocode Quick Geocode is a shortcut to geocoding your table with MapMarker. Use it to geocode previously opened tables with a single click. For example, use Quick Geocode on tables that you update frequently and need to geocode new records. Quick Geocode follows the geocoding preferences and system preferences settings you specify to carry out the geocoding operation. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 129

130 Specialized Geocoding Features Quick Geocode is available after you open a table in MapMarker and set the input and output columns, geocoding, and system preferences. You can geocode the entire table or a portion of the table. When you close the table, the settings are written to the table s metadata and the system registry, preserving your preferences for the next time you need to geocode the table. Note: MapMarker attempts to geocode all records in the table during a Quick Geocode pass, regardless of their previous geocoding status. Finding Address with Quick Find The MapMarker Quick Find feature provides a fast way to determine the correct address for a single record. If there are several match candidates to choose from, you can view them on a map to help determine the best choice. Quick Find does not geocode the record. It simply attempts to match the address to the address dictionary and return potential matches to help you confirm or correct the address. Quick Find can generate the following kinds of results. street geocoding street intersection geocoding postal fallback geographic fallback street browse place browse Quick Find can also be used as a method to browse the Address Dictionary for the correct spelling of a street name. Provide the postal code and at least the first letter of the street and click the Browse button. The city and state fields are optional. MapMarker returns a list of streets that meet your criteria. See the following topics: Finding Candidates Using Quick Find on page 130 Browsing Candidates Using Quick Find on page 136 Quick Find Settings on page 137 Finding Candidates Using Quick Find To view potential matches on a map from Quick Find: 1. Select Search > Quick Find to display the Quick Find dialog box. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 130

131 Specialized Geocoding Features 2. Type the address you wish to find and click Search. Candidates are displayed in the Match Candidate List. The number and type of candidates returned by Quick Find depends on the criteria set in Quick Find Settings on page 137. Use those settings to select street level, postal fallback, or geographic fallback options. A green check mark in the Num column indicates a close match. Browse candidates do not have a ResultCode or close match indicator. Match Candidate List The Match Candidate List displays each potential match with detailed results in named columns. Use the horizontal scroll bar to see all the columns. The specific column headings depend on the type of geocoding (street, postal, or geographic) and the available data dictionaries. For example, consider the following input address with the TomTom Streets and Centrus Points address dictionaries available. Firm: DeFazio Pizza Address: 266 4th St City: Troy State: NY Zip Code: MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 131

132 Specialized Geocoding Features Geocoding this address using Standard mode returns one close match candidate. The Candidate List Columns table shows the candidate returns for the Centrus Points dictionary and for the TomTom streets dictionary. The details would vary if a different address dictionary was used. Candidate List Columns Column Centrus Points Used TomTom Streets Dictionary Used Result Code S8HPNTSCZA S5HPNTSCZA Match Code S00 S80 Location Code AP02 AS0 Firm DEFAZIO PIZZA DEFAZIO PIZZA Street 266 4TH ST 266 4TH ST LastLine TROY NY TROY NY Coordinate , , DataSource Name CENTRUS POINT DATA TomTom Note: These columns also appear in candidates returned by interactive geocoding. See Geocoding Your Table Interactively on page 49. DataSource Name The DataSource Name identifies the datasource from which the street geocoded candidate was returned. The source is identified by a descriptive string or number that corresponds to a specific datasource. Note: Postal and geographic candidates do not return datasource information. For Desktop application table geocoding (automatic or interactive), the DataSource type output address column must be mapped if you want that information to be returned. See Specify Output Address Columns on page 26. The Desktop application Quick Find and Interactive dialogs return the datasource descriptive strings. For automatic geocoding (or in the API), the corresponding number is returned, because the number is more suitable for batch processing and programmatic use. The DataSource numbers and names are summarized in the DataSource Numbers and Names table. DataSource Numbers and Names DataSource Number DataSource Name 0 USPS data 1 TIGER data MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 132

133 Specialized Geocoding Features DataSource Numbers and Names(Continued) DataSource Number DataSource Name 2 TomTom data 5 deprecated 6 NAVTEQ NAVSTREETS 7 TomTom point data 8 Centrus point data 10 User Dictionary 11 NAVTEQ Point Addressing data Result Code In the Candidate List Columns example, the Centrus Point dictionary returns an S8 result code. Only a point dictionary can return an S8 result. A street segment dictionary returns an S5 result. Result Codes are covered in Chapter 5 Result Codes. Match Code and Location Code Match Codes describe the portion of the address that matched or failed to match. Location Codes provide detailed information on the accuracy and quality of the assigned geocode. These codes also differ depending on which dictionary was used for the candidate match. Match Codes and Location Codes are covered in Match Codes and Location Codes on page 266. Viewing Quick Find Candidates on a Map To visualize Quick Find candidates on a map, you must first specify a valid location of the street data. This activates the Map button on the Interactive or Quick Find dialog box. See Maps System Preferences for more information. 1. After pointing to a valid location for your street data, follow these steps: 2. Select the candidate that you want to display on a map and click Map. Use Ctrl-Click to select multiple candidates. The Candidate Map window appears and selected candidates are displayed. The color-coded symbols (stars or circles) represent the level MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 133

134 Specialized Geocoding Features of geocoding precision for each record. See Displaying Geocoded Records in MapInfo Professional. 3. Use the Pan, Zoom, and Label tools to help you identify the best match for your address. Use the Label tool to identify surrounding streets and features for additional information about the area. 4. With the Select tool, click the candidate symbol for your match and click OK. You are returned to the Quick Find dialog box. The candidate is highlighted in the list. Make a note of the corrected address and click Close. You can also copy selected candidate information to the clipboard. See Copying Information and Displaying Status Codes for Quick Find Candidates on page 135. Quick Find also supports single line address searching in the Address field. A single line address has all address components on a single line rather than in separate fields. For example, in the Address/Single Line Address field of the Quick Find dialog, you can enter an address such as: One Global View, Troy NY, MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 134

135 Specialized Geocoding Features 5. When you click Search, candidates are listed in the Match Candidate List. In this example, MapMarker makes a close match. For a more complete explanation of single line address searching, see Using Single Line Addresses in Geocoding. Note: Candidates from a Quick Find Browse cannot be displayed on a map. See Browsing Candidates Using Quick Find on page 136 for more information. Displaying Address Ranges After selecting a street level, postal, or geographic candidate from the list, you can display the address ranges associated with a candidate. To display address ranges, do either of the following: Select a candidate and click Range, or Double-click the candidate The ZIP + 4 is also displayed immediately to the right of each street range. The Range feature is available with candidates from a Quick Find search. You cannot display address ranges from a Quick Find Browse. See Browsing Candidates Using Quick Find on page 136. Copying Information and Displaying Status Codes for Quick Find Candidates Each Quick Find candidate in the Match Candidate List includes the result code, address components, and latitude / longitude coordinates. Browse candidates will have street name or place name only. You can copy the appropriate information to the clipboard and paste it into another application. For example, you can copy the address or coordinates into MapInfo Professional so that you can display the location on a map using al the features of MapInfo Professional. You can also display the Status Codes dialog and see information on GeoResult codes, Match codes, and Locational codes. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 135

136 Specialized Geocoding Features Right-click on one or more candidates in the Match Candidate List. You will see the following choices in the context menu, depending on whether the list contains street geocoded, postal fallback, or geographic fallback candidates. Copy from Quick Find List Menu Selection Action Available for Show Status Code Details Copy Address Displays the Status Codes dialog with tabs for GeoResult Code, Match Code, and Location Code. See GeoResult Code dialog, Match Code Dialog, and Location Code dialog for details. Copy street address for selected candidates. street geocoding candidates postal or geographic fallback candidates street geocoding candidates Copy Coordinates as LAT/LONG Copy Coordinates as LONG/LAT Copy coordinates in the order Y/X for selected candidates. Copy coordinates in the order X / Y for selected candidates. street geocoding candidates postal or geographic fallback candidates street geocoding candidates postal or geographic fallback candidates Copy Latitude Only Copy Longitude Only Copy All Copy Y coordinate only for selected candidates. Copy X coordinate only for selected candidates. Copy result code, location and match codes, complete address, and coordinates for selected candidates. street geocoding candidates postal or geographic fallback candidates street geocoding candidates postal or geographic fallback candidates street geocoding candidates postal or geographic fallback candidates Browsing Candidates Using Quick Find You can also use the Quick Find dialog to browse the address dictionary for the correct spelling of a street name or business. You cannot copy information from Quick Find browse candidates. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 136

137 Specialized Geocoding Features Enter the ZIP Code and at least the first letter of the street or business and click Browse. The city and state fields are optional. MapMarker returns a list of streets or businesses that meet your criteria. Browsing does not geocode the record, but you can use the browse results to confirm your address and then geocode based on this information. To maximize the ability of MapMarker to return a list of browsed candidates, it is best to provide only a partial street or business name. Note: The Map and Ranges buttons are unavailable when you Browse from the Quick Find dialog box. For example, after browsing on the street "Broad" in ZIP Code 12180, the Browsed Results list box displays street names and address ranges for Broadway, Broadview Ct, Broadview Terrace, and similarly named streets. Quick Find Settings You can change the criteria used for generating your Quick Find search results. In the Quick Find Settings dialog, you can choose to: select one of the match modes (including CASS mode) select address components that must match exactly (house number, street name, city name, ZIP Code prefer a ZIP Code match over a City Name match choose fallback options list all candidates or list close candidates only MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 137

138 Specialized Geocoding Features To change the Quick Find settings: 1. Open the Quick Find dialog (see Finding Address with Quick Find on page Click Quick Find Settings. The Quick Find Settings dialog appears. 3. Select the settings you wish to use and then click OK. Quick Find Settings Quick Find Setting Description Match Modes Standard Mode Tight Mode Relaxed Mode CASS Check this box to implement Standard Mode matching. See Match Modes. Check this box to implement Tight Mode. See Match Modes. Check this box to implement Relaxed Mode. See Match Modes. Check this box to use CASS mode in finding addresses. Note: When this check box is selected, the other settings options on this dialog are disabled and their values are overwritten by CASS rules. List Candidates options (All Candidates and Close Candidates Only) are available for selection. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 138

139 Specialized Geocoding Features Quick Find Settings (Continued) Quick Find Setting Description Custom Selections (Exact Match Required) House Number Street Name City Name ZIP Code Check this box to require the use of house number in determining an exact match. Check this box to require the use of street name in determining an exact match. Check this box to require the use of city name in determining an exact match. Check this box to require the use of ZIP Code in determining an exact match. Search Level Settings Search Level Finance Area City Expanded search Distance in miles Limit to current state Select Finance Area, City, or Expanded from the drop down list. Check this box to perform street level geocoding within the Finance Area in which the input street is located. Check this box to perform street level geocoding within the city that the input street is located. Searches for an address within a given radius (miles) of the input address. See Using Expanded Search on page 72. If Expanded Search is selected, Radius specifies the number of miles from the input address to expand the search. You cans specify up to 99 (miles). If Expanded Search is selected, Limit to State limits the expanded search to the same state of the input address, regardless of the mile radius. Other Settings Prefer Matching ZIP over Matching City Check this box to prefer an internal close candidate on postal code over a match on city. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 139

140 Specialized Geocoding Features Quick Find Settings (Continued) Quick Find Setting Use Wide Search Description Use wide search to consider all streets that begin with the first letter of the input street name, and therefore can identify many more potential candidates. Wide search is most often used in combination with Relaxed mode as part of a multiple-pass geocoding strategy. See Using Wide Search with Multiple Pass Strategy on page 74. Fallback Fallback to ZIP Centroid Fallback to Geographic Centroid Click this option to allow fallback to ZIP Code Centroids. If a close match was not found using the Require Exact Match criteria, you can still geocode based on ZIP Code centroids. Click this option to allow fallback to geographic centroids. If a close match was not found using the Require Exact Match criteria, you still can geocode based on state, county, or city centroids. These are not very specific geocoding options, but may be suitable for certain applications. Candidates to Return All Candidates Click this option to return all candidates matching the search criteria you specify. Close Candidates Only Click this option to return only the candidates that closely match the search criteria you specify. Finding Airports with Locate Airport The MapMarker Locate Airport feature allows you to locate an airport using a state abbreviation or a specific airport code. Enter an airport code or two-letter state abbreviation in the text field of the Search frame. The Search Results box returns the number of successful matches for a state, match found for an airport code, or no matching records found. After a successful match, the Airport List field displays the airport code, airport name, state, and latitude/longitude coordinates. To locate an airport: 4. On the Search menu, click Locate Airport. The Locate Airport dialog appears. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 140

141 Specialized Geocoding Features 5. Type the airport code or the state abbreviation in the Airport Code or State Abbreviation field (for example, ALB for Albany International Airport or NY for all airports in New York). 6. Click Search. MapMarker returns all matching airports in the Airport List box, sorted by airport code. In this example, the airports for Arizona are displayed in alphabetical order by airport code. If a match cannot be made, the Search Results box displays one of three messages depending on your search criteria: Result Messages for Airport Search Search Results Message Invalid state or location code. Invalid state code. No matching records found. Description The airport or state code you searched for did not contain at least two alphanumeric characters. Retype the airport or state code, using two characters if searching by state, or three to four characters if searching by airport code. The two-character code you searched for did not match a valid state code. Type the correct state code to search for all airports in the state or type the complete three- or four-character airport code to search for a specific airport. The three- or four-character code you searched for did not match a valid airport code. Type the correct airport code to search for the airport or type a state code to search for all airports in the indicated state. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 141

142 Specialized Geocoding Features Finding Highway Exits with Locate Highway Exit The MapMarker Locate Highway Exit feature allows you to locate a highway exit using the highway name, exit number, and state. You must enter a highway name, an exit number or exit name, and a state in order for the search to return a result. Search results include the highway name, full exit name, city, state, ZIP Code, and X and Y coordinates for the exit. You can select a search result and click Map to view the candidate s location on a map to determine which candidate is the exact one you are looking for. To locate a highway exit: 1. On the Search menu, click Locate Highway Exit. The Locate Highway Exit dialog appears. 2. Type a highway name in the Highway field (for example, I-90 East or Interstate 90 East). 3. In the Exit field, type either an: exit number (for example, 2 or Exit 2). exit name (for example, Fuller Rd). Do not add a period or other punctuation after the street type (specify the street type as Rd or Ave). 4. Type a state abbreviation in the State field (for example, NY for New York). 5. Click Search. MapMarker returns all matching highway exits in the Search Results box. Batch Geocoding MapMarker supports batch geocoding for geocoding one or more files without user interaction. You create a batch file containing the path and file names of the tables to geocode and specify the geocoding preferences you want applied to the session. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 142

143 Specialized Geocoding Features Batch geocoding is useful for overnight processing of large databases or when a table is updated regularly via a scheduling program. CASS geocoding can also be set up as a batch process. Note: You can batch geocode MapInfo TAB files, comma-delimited (CSV), text files (TXT), and project files (PROJ). However, you usually cannot batch geocode ODBC database files, since a password is typically required and that requires user intervention. The procedure for creating a batch file varies depending on whether the input file is a TAB file or other file type. See the following topics: Creating a Project-Based Batch File Creating a Batch Geocoding File from a TAB File Batch Geocoding Considerations Creating a Batch Geocoding File from a TAB File To create a batch geocoding file from a TAB file, follow these steps: 1. Open a table in MapMarker and proceed through the select column dialogs to confirm the input and output columns. See Selecting Input and Output Address Columns. 2. When you have finished specifying input and output columns, use the tabs in the Geocode dialog to select your geocoding settings. After selecting the settings, click Apply. Click the dialog Help buttons to learn more about each geocoding option. 3. When done with the settings, click Cancel in the Geocode dialog then choose Table > Create Batch File. The Save Batch File As dialog appears. 4. Specify the path and filename for the batch file. By default the batch file uses the root file name of the table with the extension *.bat. Click Save. 5. Repeat step 1 through step 4 for each additional table you want to include in the batch file. When saving to an existing batch file, such as the one initially created in step 4, the name of the table is appended to the end of the batch file. To create a new batch file, use a new filename. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 143

144 Specialized Geocoding Features Note: If you want to batch geocode CSV or TXT files, you must create a project (PROJ file) to accomplish this. For information on creating a project, see Creating and Saving a Project. To run a project from a batch file, see Creating a Project-Based Batch File. To run a batch file, double-click on the filename in Windows Explorer. MapMarker starts running and opens each table listed in the batch file in turn and then geocodes it to the specified settings. If MapMarker encounters an error, it stops. Manually Creating a Batch File from a TAB File For TAB files, you can create a batch geocoding file without using a project. To do this, create a BAT file in a text editor and indicate the following: the path and filename of the MapMarker executable program the path and filename of the TAB file any geocoding preferences that you want MapMarker to follow The parameters can be listed in any order and can use uppercase, lowercase, or mixed case text. You must also open the table in MapMarker at least once and set the preferences. Otherwise MapMarker will geocode using the default settings for that table as found in the metadata. See the following table: Batch Geocoding Parameters for TAB File. These parameters are only used for batch files based on TAB files. For project-based batch files, the preferences and parameters are encapsulated in the project file itself. Batch Geocoding Parameters for TAB File Parameter /TABLE=c:\sample\table /LOG=<logfile name> /STREET or /ZIP /START=<number> /END=<number> /ALL or /UNMATCHED /EXACT_HOUSE=Y,N /EXACT_STREET=Y,N Description Path and filename of table to geocode. Name of log file. MapMarker writes the geocoding results to this file. If a log file is not specified, MapMarker creates a default Mapmarkr.log file. Specify geocode precision to street level or to ZIP Code centroids. Specify the starting row number to geocode. If omitted, MapMarker begins with row 1. Specify the ending row number to geocode. If omitted, MapMarker ends at the end of the table. Specify whether to geocode all records or only unmatched records. Specify Y to geocode to the exact house number. Specify Y to geocode to the exact street name. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 144

145 Specialized Geocoding Features Batch Geocoding Parameters for TAB File (Continued) Parameter /EXACT_CITY=Y,N /EXACT_ZIP=Y,N /STREET_ONLY=Y,N /STREET_PTZIP_ONLY=Y, N. /FALLBACK=NO,ZIP4,ZIP2,ZIP /MATCH_MODE=STANDA RD, TIGHT, RELAXED, CUSTOM /MULTI=NO,FIRST,STREE T,ZIP /PREFER_UD=Y,N Description Specify Y to geocode to the exact city name. Specify Y to geocode to the exact ZIP Code. Specify Y geocode only to street addresses, not to ZIP codes. Specify Y to geocode to exact street address and point ZIP Codes. Specify whether MapMarker falls back to a ZIP Code, and if so, to which precision: ZIP + 4, ZIP + 2, or ZIP Code Specify STANDARD to implement the Standard Match Mode. TIGHT implements Tight match mode, RELAXED implements Relaxed match mode. CUSTOM mode allows for exact match criteria. Match Modes are set in the Match Settings Dialog. See the topic Match Modes for a specific discussion of match modes. Specify how MapMarker handles multiple matches: No = do not geocode First = geocode to the first candidate from a multiple match Street = choose a street match over a ZIP Code match ZIP = choose a ZIP Code match over a street match. Specify User Dictionary match over the MapMarker Address Dictionary. Note: The user must have a user dictionary path already set up to use this setting. /MIXED_CASE=Y,N /CASS /PREF_ZIP_OVER_CITY= Y,N /WIDE_SEARCH Specify output street addresses to have mixedcase. Add this parameter to do CASS geocoding; omit parameter to do non-cass geocoding. CASS mode enforces Finance Area search. See /SEARCH_FINANCE. Specify Y to prefer ZIP Code match over city match. Add this parameter to enable wide search; omit parameter to disable wide search. This can be used with any match mode except CASS mode. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 145

146 Specialized Geocoding Features Batch Geocoding Parameters for TAB File (Continued) Parameter /SEARCH_FINANCE /SEARCH_CITY /SEARCH_EXPANDED /SEARCH_RADIUS=<dista nce> Only present with Expanded /LIMIT_TO_STATE Only applies if /SEARCH_EXPANDED is used, otherwise ignored Description Perform street level geocoding within the Finance Area in which the input street is located. Note that if more than one /SEARCH parameter is specified in the batch file, the last one listed takes effect. Also, CASS mode enforces Finance Area search and other search level parameters are ignored. Perform street level geocoding within the city that the input street is located. Expand the search to a given radius from the input address. Specifies the number of miles from the input address to expand the search. You cans specify up to 99 (miles). Limits the expanded search to the same state of the input address, regardless of the mile radius. Following is a sample geocoding batch file. This same batch file could be created manually or through the MapMarker interface. "C:\Program Files\MapInfo\MapMarker_USA_v29\desktop\mapmarkr.exe" /TABLE=C:\Program Files\MapInfo\MapMarker_USA_v29\desktop\sampdata\ US_ADDR.TAB /LOG=mapmarkr.log /UNMATCHED /START=1 /END=20 /PREFER_UD=N /MIXED_CASE=N /STREET /EXACT_HOUSE=Y /EXACT_STREET=N /EXACT_CITY=N /EXACT_ZIP=N /STREET_ONLY=N /STREET_PTZIP_ONLY=N /FALLBACK=NO /MULTI=NO Batch Geocoding Considerations This section describes how batch geocoding handles information in your table. Batch geocoding is available only for MapInfo TAB files. Batch geocoding of delimited text files and remote database (ODBC) files is not supported. Batch File Contents for TAB and Other File Types A batch files based on TAB files can contain the parameters listed in the table: Batch Geocoding Parameters for TAB File. However, a project-based batch file (used for Delimited and Text files), simply identifies and runs the project file, and does not use any other parameters. For project-based batch files, the preferences and parameters are encapsulated in the project file itself. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 146

147 Specialized Geocoding Features Running the Batch File MapMarker should not be running when you run the batch file. The batch file will start MapMarker, execute the instructions, then exit. Table Settings and Preferences If you list a table in the batch file without parameters, MapMarker geocodes to the default settings for the table (whatever the settings were the last time the table was opened in MapMarker). The batch geocoder uses the system preferences that are set at the time of geocoding. To ensure that a particular system setting is used, such as the location of the address dictionary, choose the setting in the System Preferences dialog, apply it, make the batch file, and run the batch file during the same MapMarker session. CASS Geocoding in a Batch Process When you do CASS geocoding on a table in a batch geocoding process, some of the command line parameters are overridden to the CASS settings. The CASS settings for these parameters are as follows: Input and Output Columns MapMarker uses the input and output columns it finds in the table s metadata. Columns cannot be changed for batch geocoding. Table Attribution with MapMarker With MapMarker, you can add information from one table to another, either before, during, or after the geocoding process. This ability is called attribution. Any table in MapInfo format (TAB file) can be a candidate for attribution. This includes boundary and point files, demographic tables, or non-geographic tables. The table to which the attributes are being applied must be local, since it is the table you are geocoding. The table containing the source attributes can be local or remote. Note: You cannot use table attribution with a text file. Attribution works with TAB files only. There are two ways to do attribution in MapMarker. They are defined by the type of link required to connect the two tables: Output Point attribution links the geocoded table to the attribution table by geography, specifically by matching latitude and longitude point coordinates within the geocoded table to a geographic boundary defined within the attribution table. For output point attribution, the attribution table must include a map object table (MAP). Column Value attribution matches (joins) a column in the geocoded table to an equivalent column in the attribution table. The column in the attribute table must be indexed. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 147

148 Specialized Geocoding Features Attribution can operate either during a geocoding pass or as a separate batch process. Only successfully geocoded or matched records receive attribute data. Batch attribution is generally faster than geocoding with attribution enabled. Column value attribution is faster than output point attribution. The general process for Output Point attribution in MapMarker is as follows: 1. Open the table that you want to geocode. This is the table into which you import attributes. 2. Select the attribution table. 3. Create a column to receive attribution data. 4. Bind the attribute column in your geocoding table to attribution table column. either by Output Point or Column Value. 5. Geocode the table to add the attributes or run the batch attribution process. Each of these steps is described more fully in the following topics: Opening the Table for Attribution on page 148 Selecting an Attribution Table on page 149 Creating a Column to Receive Attribution Data on page 150 Binding Attributes Output Point Attribution on page 152 Binding Attributes Column Value Attribution on page 153 Adding Attributes to Your Table on page 154 Stopping Attribution on page 155 Clearing Attribute File Selections on page 156 Tips for Using Attributions on page 156 Opening the Table for Attribution First you must open the geocoding table into which you want to add attributes. Follow these steps: 1. Open the MapInfo table. Select File > Open Table, navigate to the table you want to open and click Open. For example, open the US_ADDR.TAB file, which contains sample addresses from the U.S. 2. Click Next, then Finish. At the Geocode dialog, the click Cancel. Do not geocode at this point. You are now ready to select an attribution table from which you want to pull attributes into your geocoding table. See Selecting an Attribution Table on page 149. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 148

149 Specialized Geocoding Features Selecting an Attribution Table To select an attribution table that you want to pull attributes from, follow these steps. 1. Open the Select Attribute Tables dialog by doing one of the following: On the Table menu, select Geocode and on the Geocode tab click Configure Attribution. On the Table menu, select Add Attributes and click Select Attribute Files. The Select Attribute Tables dialog appears. 2. Navigate to the location of the attribute table that you wish to pull attributes from. Use the Drives list to select the drive containing the attribute table, and then navigate that drive. MapMarker provides a sample attribution table in the <install>\desktop\mapmarker\sampdata directory called CNTYDEMO.TAB. You can use this table to try out the attribution feature using Output Point attribution. 3. When you locate the attribute table you wish to use, click it and then click Add. The full path to the table appears in the Selected Tables box. Repeat to add additional tables. When finished selecting attribution tables, click Next. 4. The Bind Attribute Table Columns to Output Columns dialog box appears. In the Join Using group, select Output Point (this example describes output point attribution). MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 149

150 Specialized Geocoding Features You must now create a new column to contain the attribution data. Do not click OK at this point, but continue to Creating a Column to Receive Attribution Data on page 150. Creating a Column to Receive Attribution Data After you have selected an attribution table (Selecting an Attribution Table on page 149), the Bind Attribute Table Columns to Output Columns dialog box appears. You must create a new column to contain the attribution data and define the properties of this new column. Follow these steps: 1. Click Modify/Add Columns to access the Modify Table Structure dialog. 2. Click Add Column to add a new column to the table. The Columns list box displays a new default 10-character column named Field# (where # is the column number in the table). MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 150

151 Specialized Geocoding Features 3. In the Column Information group, define the Name, Type, and Width of the new column containing the attributes. This column must have the same type and width as the attribution table column that you are pulling attributes from. Click OK when done editing the new column information. In this example, you have added a 25-character column named Attrib_Cnty Add any additional output columns if necessary. Then click OK. 4. A prompt appears, informing you that the table must be closed and reopened to complete the update. Click Yes. The table is updated with the new column. This may take some time, depending on the size of the table. When the update is complete, the revised Bind Attribute Table Columns to Output Columns dialog appears. This shows that the required output column has been added. 5. Click OK. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 151

152 Specialized Geocoding Features Your original geocoding table (US_ADDR.TAB in this example) now contains a blank Attrib_Cnty column that can store the attributes from your attribution table. You can view the added column using the table browser. You are now ready to bind the attribute columns in your geocoding table to attribution table columns. If you want to add attributes based on common geography, see Binding Attributes Output Point Attribution on page 152. If you want to add attributes using joined columns, see Binding Attributes Column Value Attribution on page 153. You can do both types of attribution at the same time, provided you have selected the appropriate types of tables to use. Each attribution table you select can only be used for one type of attribution either output point or column value. Binding Attributes Output Point Attribution Output point attribution links the geocoded table to the attribution table by geography, specifically by matching latitude and longitude point coordinates within the geocoded table to a geographic boundary defined within the attribution table. For output point attribution, the attribution table must include a map object file (MAP). 6. To set up output point attribution: 7. After completing the procedure for Creating a Column to Receive Attribution Data), you will see the Bind Attribute Table Columns to Output Columns dialog. If this dialog is not already open, select Table > Add Attributes > Select Attribute Files and click Next at the Select Attribute tables dialog. This will return you to the Bind Attribute Table Columns to Output Columns dialog box. From this dialog, use the Attribute Table Name drop-down list and select the table from which you want to copy attributes. 8. If necessary, click Output Point in the Join Information group. 9. From the list at the left, select the column in your table from which you want to pull attributes. For example, select the Ctyname column. 10.From the list at the right, select the output column into which you want to add attributes. For example, select the Attrib_Cnty column. 11.Click Bind to Column. The input column list box indicates the output column number to which the input column is bound. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 152

153 Specialized Geocoding Features Repeat this process for each output point attribution you wish to do. For each table you select, you can choose whether to do output point or column value attribution. The Modify/Add Columns button may be disabled. If so, this is because the input and output columns have already been mapped. You cannot add or modify columns at this time. You can change the type of attribution (Output Point or Column Value) and change column bindings. 12.When finished, click OK. You are now ready to add the bound attributes to your table. See Adding Attributes to Your Table on page 154. Binding Attributes Column Value Attribution Column value attribution matches (joins) a column in the geocoded table to an equivalent column in the attribution table. The column in the attribution table must be indexed. (That is, there must be an IND file to accompany the DAT file.) To set up column value attribution: 1. After completing the procedure for Creating a Column to Receive Attribution Data), you will see the Bind Attribute Table Columns to Output Columns dialog. From this dialog, use the Attribute Table Name drop-down list and select the table from which you want to copy attributes. 2. Click Column Value in the Join Information group. 3. In the Attribute Table Column drop-down list, select the column in the attribution table that you want to join to the output table. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 153

154 Specialized Geocoding Features 4. In the Output Table Column drop-down list, click the column in the output table that you want to join to the attribution table. 5. In the Characters used in comparison box, type the number of characters you want MapMarker to use in determining a match between the joined attribute and output columns. 6. In the input table list box at the bottom left of the dialog, select the column in the attribute table from which you want to pull attributes. For example, select the PostCode column. 7. In the output table list box at the bottom right of the dialog, select the column in your geocoded table into which you want to add attributes. For example, select the ZIPCode column. (You may need to add this column if it does not already exist.) 8. Click Bind to Column. The input column list box indicates the output column number to which the input column is bound. Repeat this process for each column value attribution you wish to do. For each table you select, you can choose whether to do output point or column value attribution. 9. When finished, click OK. You are now ready to add the bound attributes to your table. You can do this by geocoding the table or by adding attributes via a batch process. See Adding Attributes to Your Table. Adding Attributes to Your Table Once you have bound your attribute and output table columns (see Binding Attributes Output Point Attribution on page 152) or Binding Attributes Column Value Attribution on page 153), you are ready to add attributes to your table. One means of doing attribution is MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 154

155 Specialized Geocoding Features by geocoding your table (see Adding Attributes By Geocoding). You can also add attributes using a batch process (see Adding Attributes Using Batch Process), which is done without geocoding the table. Output point attribution must be done on a table either during a geocoding run or by a batch process using a table that has already been geocoded. Column value attribution can be done prior to, during, or after geocoding. See the following topics: Adding Attributes By Geocoding Adding Attributes Using Batch Process Stopping Attribution Clearing Attribute File Selections Tips for Using Attributions Adding Attributes By Geocoding When you geocode the table, each record in your table is opened and processed. At this time, MapMarker also pulls the attributes defined from the attribution table columns you specified when setting up attribution, and inputs those attributes into your table s target column(s). For information on geocoding your table, see Chapter 2 Geocoding with MapMarker. Adding Attributes Using Batch Process You can use a batch process to add attributes to your table any time after setting up attribution. When you batch add attributes, MapMarker uses the table joins and bindings that you defined when setting up attribution, copies the matched attributes from the attribution table(s), and adds them to your table in the column(s) you specified. Batch attribution is generally faster than geocoding with attribution enabled. To batch add attributes: 1. If it is not already open, open the MapInfo table. 2. Select Table > Add Attributes > Batch Add Attributes. The Updating Table process indicator appears and automatically closes once attribution is complete. Stopping Attribution Once attribution is set up for your table, MapMarker does attribution on your table every time you geocode until you instruct it to stop. Attribution is enabled every subsequent time you open the table as well, until you manually stop attribution for the table. Stopping attribution does not remove the attribution information for the table, rather, it stops any further attribution for the table while it is open in MapMarker. To completely remove all attribution information for the table, see Clearing Attribute File Selections. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 155

156 Specialized Geocoding Features To stop table attribution: 1. If it is not already open, open the MapInfo table. 2. Select Table > Add Attributes > Stop Attribution. When you stop attribution, MapMarker no longer does attribution on the table while the table is open, but the attribution settings are still defined within your table s metadata. You can view the metadata by opening the a TAB file in a text editor. The attribution information is located at the bottom of the metadata, and resembles the following: "\MapMarker\AddAttributes" = "" "\MapMarker\AddAttributes\InputTables" = "1" "\MapMarker\AddAttributes\Layer0" = "c:\program files\mapinfo\mapmarker\sampdata\cntydemo.tab" "\MapMarker\AddAttributes\Layer0\BindOnPoint" = "1" "\MapMarker\AddAttributes\Layer0\Attribute0" = "Ctyname "\MapMarker\AddAttributes\Layer0\AttributeCount" = "1" County_nam" Clearing Attribute File Selections If you decide that you do not want to perform attribution for your table, you can clear the attribute file selections for your table. The table is no longer set up for attribution. When you clear attribute file selections, all attribution information in your table s metadata is removed permanently. If you want to do attribution on your table in the future, you must configure new attribution settings for your table (See Table Attribution with MapMarker on page 147 for the basic steps to setting up and doing attribution.) To clear attribute file selections: 1. If it is not already open, open the MapInfo table. 2. Select Table > Add Attributes > Clear File Selections. If you want to stop the attribution process without removing the attribution metadata from your table, see Stopping Attribution on page 155. Tips for Using Attributions Consider the following when using attributes: The Add Attributes feature is available only after you have selected the input and output columns for your geocoding table. Do not open the attribution table in MapMarker. As long as you provide the path in the Select Attribute Tables dialog, MapMarker is able to retrieve information from it. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 156

157 7 7 Geocoding Remote Tables In addition to geocoding MapInfo native format (TAB) and other supported table formats as described in Supported File Formats, MapMarker can geocode tables that are stored on remote database systems. MapMarker geocodes remote relational databases via ODBC, an open database connectivity standard. MapMarker uses ODBC to access the data and store the resulting geocoding data and spatial object remotely. This ensures that data integrity and security are maintained. The general process of geocoding these databases is the same as for local tables, but this chapter covers the information specific to remote table geocoding. In this chapter Supported Databases 158 Remote Tables and Spatial Objects 158 Preparing to Geocode Remote Databases 159 Accessing a Remote Table for Geocoding 160 Writing Geocoding Output to Another Table 161 Additional Considerations for Remote Table Geocoding 166

158 Geocoding Remote Tables Supported Databases MapMarker USA 29 supports the following ODBC databases and drivers. SQL Server Microsoft Access Oracle For a list of ODBC databases supported by MapMarker (including Microsoft Access, Oracle, and SQL Server) see your product-specific MapMarker Release Notes. You must install the Oracle driver separately. To use the driver, you must have the Oracle client installed. Remote Tables and Spatial Objects MapMarker supports remote database geocoding via ODBC for relational database management systems (RDBMS). The RDBMS stores coordinates in X,Y columns. The RDBMS stores the geocoded spatial object directly. See the following topics: Mappable Tables and the MapInfo Map Catalog on page 158 Supported Spatial Index Types on page 158 Mappable Tables and the MapInfo Map Catalog This section describes the mappable tables and the MapInfo Map Catalog, features that are an integral part of remote geocoding with MapMarker. A mappable table is a table of data that has its spatial information recorded in the MapInfo Map Catalog. Mappable tables are managed by the MapInfo Map Catalog. MapMarker reads the Map Catalog each time you geocode a remote mappable table to know how to handle the spatial object. A Map Catalog is optional for X,Y databases. The MapInfo Map Catalog must have an entry for each table in the database that you wish to geocode. We recommend that you create your Map Catalog and make a table mappable within MapInfo Professional. Specific tools and commands are provided there for this purpose. If, however, you do not have access to MapInfo Professional, you can do these procedures manually. See Manually Creating a MapInfo Map Catalog. Supported Spatial Index Types MapMarker supports X,Y (for Oracle, SQL Server, and Microsoft Access). This is shown in the Map Catalog under the column SPATIALTYPE for X,Y. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 158

159 Geocoding Remote Tables Preparing to Geocode Remote Databases Before you can geocode your remote table with MapMarker, you (or the database administrator) must set up MapMarker and your database to handle the geocoding operation. In general, the process follows these steps: 1. Create a data source for the RDBMS (see Creating a Data Source on page 159). 2. Prepare the remote table with the appropriate columns and spatial handling requirements (see Preparing the Remote Table on page 159). 3. Create a Map Catalog for each remote database (see Creating a Map Catalog on page 160). 4. Make the remote table mappable (see Making a Remote Table Mappable on page 160). See the following topics: Creating a Data Source on page 159 Preparing the Remote Table on page 159 Creating a Map Catalog on page 160 Making a Remote Table Mappable on page 160 Creating a Data Source After the drivers are installed, create a data source for your database. Use the ODBC Administrative Tools in the Control Panel for this purpose. If 32-bit drivers are used with a 64-bit Windows system, use the 32-bit ODBC manager. This is odbcad32.exe located in C:\Windows\SysWOW64. To create an ODBC data source, follow these steps: 1. From Control Panel > Administrative Tools, double-click Data Sources (ODBC) to display the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog. Under the User DSN tab, click Add. 2. At the Create New Data Source dialog, choose the appropriate driver. Click Finish. The ODBC Setup dialog is displayed. The dialog differs depending on your database. 3. Fill out the dialog per your needs and click OK. Select allows you to associate a specific database with the data source. 4. Return to the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog and click OK. Preparing the Remote Table You or your database administrator must add columns to the table to store the results of the geocoding operation. For the X,Y spatial index type, there must be one column for longitude values and another column for latitude values. The longitude and latitude columns should be decimal type (11,6 or larger) or float. See Output Column Type/Width Requirements. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 159

160 Geocoding Remote Tables In addition, you may wish to add a column to your table for storing the result code that MapMarker generates. The result code describes the type of geocoding match that was attempted. If you plan to write geocoding output to another table, provide those columns as well. See Writing Geocoding Output to Another Table for more information. Creating a Map Catalog Create a Map Catalog for each remote database you want to access in MapMarker. In MapInfo Professional, run the utility MIODBCAT.MBX from the Run MapBasic Program command. For complete details see the topic on Accessing Remote Data in the MapInfo Professional Help System. If you are not using MapInfo Professional, you must create the Map Catalog manually, as described in Manually Creating a MapInfo Map Catalog. This process only needs to be done once for each database. Making a Remote Table Mappable For each spatial table in the remote database that you want to access in MapMarker, you must include it as a row in the MAPINFO_MAPCATALOG table. This is carried out in MapInfo Professional when you select Table > Maintenance > Make ODBC Table Mappable. For details, see the appropriate topic in the MapInfo Professional User Guide. If you do not use MapInfo Professional to manage the Map Catalog, you must manually add rows to the MAPINFO_MAPCATALOG table for each spatial table in the database that you want to geocode. See Manually Creating a MapInfo Map Catalog for further instructions. Accessing a Remote Table for Geocoding 5. After your remote database is prepared for geocoding, you are ready to open it in MapMarker and begin geocoding. Follow these steps. 6. If you have specified that the File Open dialog display at startup for ODBC tables (set in System Preferences), the Select Data Source dialog is displayed automatically when you start MapMarker. Otherwise, select File > Open ODBC Table or click Select Data Source dialog. 7. Click the Machine Data Source tab. to display the MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 160

161 Geocoding Remote Tables 8. Choose your data source. Your data source is the location of the specified database. For example, Access Files could be the name of the data source for one or more Microsoft Access tables located in a specified directory. Once connected to the Access Files data source, you can get information from any Access table. 9. Sign on to your data source in the usual way. This procedure differs depending on what type of ODBC table you are using. 10.Choose the table you want to access from the Select Table dialog. Each of the tables owned by you or accessible to you is listed. Remember that you cannot open any other tables while you have an ODBC table open. 11.Proceed with geocoding as you would with any other MapInfo table (see Geocoding Your Table Automatically and Geocoding Your Table Interactively). The procedure is the same as geocoding local tables, with the exceptions explained in the following topics. Interactive Geocoding with Remote Tables Interactive geocoding with remote database tables is basically the same as for normal tables, except that the source table cannot be updated So when you are geocoding a remote table, the Write modified address above to Input Fields on Geocode check box in the Interactive Geocode dialog is unavailable. See Geocoding Your Table Interactively on page 49. Writing Geocoding Output to Another Table MapMarker can geocode a remote database table and write the results to a table. Often database administrators do not want users to modify or write back to the source table, because of the potential of introducing errors into the database. In that case the database MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 161

162 Geocoding Remote Tables administrator can set up a related table to store the geocoding results and other output information. During geocoding MapMarker reads the input addresses from the source table and writes the results of the operation to the related results table. Note: To avoid overwriting your input data, use output columns that have different names than the corresponding input columns. If your output columns and input columns have the same name, you receive a Warning message telling you that your input data will be modified when geocoding. You can then click Yes to Continue and overwrite your input data or click No if you want to change your output column selections. See the following topics: Relationship Between Source and Results Tables on page 162 Setting Up for Related Table Geocoding on page 162 Remote Table-to-Table Geocoding on page 163 Optimizing MapMarker for Related Table Geocoding on page 166 Remote Database Views on page 166 Related Table Considerations on page 166 Relationship Between Source and Results Tables The source and results tables must be linked by a common key. In the source table, the values of the primary key must match the values in the unique key of the results table. We recommend relating the tables in a one-to-one relationship. Each address record in the source table has a corresponding record in the related results table connected by the key values. Where there is more than one record with the same address (a multiple-to-one relationship), these records may produce georesults that are written to one record. Each time MapMarker geocodes another address with the same value, it updates the output record in the results table. As long as each address record with the same key contains the same address, the output is identical. However, if two source records with the same key contain different address information, MapMarker geocodes the first record, writes its results, geocodes the second record, and updates the results with different information based on the different, and possibly incorrect, input address. If your source table contains multiple unique keys, MapMarker prompts you to choose which keys are linked to the keys in the results table. Setting Up for Related Table Geocoding Prior to geocoding, the database administrator creates a table for geocoding results that is related to the source table. The table structure includes at least one key that uniquely identifies an address in the source table. In addition it contains fields for the geocoding results, and longitude and latitude coordinates. Other optional output fields include firm, street, city, ZIP Code, ZIP + 4, Carrier Route, Delivery Point, Check Digit, and Census MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 162

163 Geocoding Remote Tables Block ID. See Specify Output Address Columns, for details on column type and width. Consult your database documentation for information on creating relational tables and primary keys. The database administrator must also create a data source for the remote source/results tables. The data source must include information that enables MapMarker to determine which data to access and how to access it. See Preparing to Geocode Remote Databases on page 159 for the instructions for setting up a data source. Remote Table-to-Table Geocoding 1. Use this procedure to geocode a remote table and write the results to a related table: 2. In MapMarker, select File > Open ODBC Table. 3. In the Select Data Source dialog box, choose either the File Data Source or Machine Data Source tab. Enter your user name and password if necessary. Click OK. 4. In the Select Database dialog box, navigate to the source table that contains the addresses you want to geocode. Enter the password if your data source requires it. For example, an MS Access database selection might appear as: For example, if you selected Machine Data Source and MS Access Database, you could navigate to the folder that contained your addresses. Click OK. 5. In the Select Table dialog box, select the specific table that contains the addresses you want to geocode, then click OK. For example, an MS Access table selection might appear as follows: MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 163

164 Geocoding Remote Tables 6. You may be asked if you want to use a different table for output. Answer Yes if you want to write the geocoded results to a different table. 7. To write results to a different table, choose the data source for the output table. For example, you might select Add_Table_Out as the results table to contain the geocoding output. Click OK. 8. If your source table has multiple unique keys, the Describe Table Relationship dialog appears. Proceed to step 9. If your table has only one key, the Select Input Column dialog appears. Skip to step In the Describe Table Relationship dialog, select the address source columns and the corresponding columns with unique keys in the results table. In the Input Table list, select the input column and drag it to the Selected Input Columns box for Key 1. In the Output Table list, select the input column/key that is linked to the input column and drag it to the Selected Output Keys box for Key 1. Repeat for additional columns and keys. To remove a column name, drag the <Clear> item on top of them. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 164

165 Geocoding Remote Tables. Click OK. The Select Input Column dialog appears. 10.In the Select Input Columns dialog, select the columns that contain the appropriate address components. Click Next. The Select Output Columns dialog is appears. 11.In the Select Output Columns dialog, identify the columns in the results table where MapMarker stores the result codes, coordinates, and output addresses. 12.Click Finish to close this dialog. The Geocode dialog appears if it is set to appear automatically in System Preferences. If the Geocode dialog does not appear, select Table > Geocode. 13.Select the Related Table tab and click either Optimize for insertion or Optimize for update. Choose Optimize for insertion if your results table is new or contains few records. Choose Optimize for update if your results table contains many records are likely to be updated. 14.Continue with the normal geocoding process by choosing options on the other dialog tabs (Geocode, Match Settings, Fallback, etc.) See Chapter 2 Geocoding with MapMarker. Note: When geocoding using multiple tables, the options, "Georesult less than" and "Unmatched rows" are not available on the Geocode tab. The option, "All types" is the only choice. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 165

166 Geocoding Remote Tables Optimizing MapMarker for Related Table Geocoding You may be writing the geocoding results to a new output table or may be updating previously geocoded records in an existing related table. To get the best performance from MapMarker, you can optimize for one situation over the other. In the Geocode dialog, choose from two settings in the Related Table tab: Optimize for Insertion or Optimize for Update. As a general rule, select Optimize for Insertion when the results table is empty or nearly so. Select Optimize for Update when the results table already contains many records that are likely to be updated. The default setting is Insertion. Note: This feature does not apply to geocoding to a table in a remote database where the input and the output results are stored in the same table. In these instances, the Related Table tab is not visible in the Geocode dialog. Remote Database Views MapMarker enables you to geocode Views of remote tables if you are writing the geocoding output to another table. A View is a subset of a table that is typically the result of a select statement. For example, you may create a View of a nationwide table that includes only records for California. Refer to your database documentation when creating Views. Note the following: The output from a View can be the base table of the View or another table. The output table cannot be a View. A Primary Key must be created for the View. GeoStan does not support getting the base table's Primary key via the View. Related Table Considerations MapMarker can write geocoding results to remote related tables using MapMarker ODBC support. All addresses must be contained in the source table, while all results must be written to a related results table. You or your database administrator must be familiar with how the two tables are related. If the tables use multiple keys, you must set the relationship before starting any geocoding. Be familiar with your data and table structure to ensure the geocoding output results are valid. Additional Considerations for Remote Table Geocoding Consider the following when doing any type of remote table geocoding: Optimizing Geocoding Performance on page 167 Geocoding Unmatched Records on page 167 MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 166

167 Geocoding Remote Tables Transaction Control with ODBC Tables on page 167 Remote Database Views on page 168 Rollback Segment Limit on page 168 Supported Unique Index and Primary Key Data Types by Database on page 168 Optimizing Geocoding Performance When using separate input and output tables, MapMarker performance is faster when the input table is indexed either by State plus City or by ZIP Code. For better performance, the output table should not be indexed. That is true even if the input and output tables are the same. For table row updates, performance is better if columns are not indexed. It is better to drop the column index before processing then create it later if it is needed. Geocoding Unmatched Records MapMarker can geocode unmatched records in previously geocoded remote tables instead of geocoding the entire table with every pass. After you select the input and output columns, go to the Geocode dialog and set the types of rows to geocode to Unmatched Rows. MapMarker attempts to find a match for all records in your table that have a georesult of N or blank. MapMarker updates the log file to reflect the total number of records it attempted to geocode during the pass, not the total number of records in the table. Note: Geocoding unmatched records is not available for multi-table geocoding. Transaction Control with ODBC Tables MapMarker uses as non-obtrusive locking mechanism as possible when geocoding your ODBC table. It attempts to use the lowest level of locking available (for example, row, page or, at worst case, table locking). Locks are not placed until the row is geocoded. MapMarker issues a commit after each update so that each lock is held for an extremely short time (the time it takes to lock a row, update it, and commit it). If MapMarker attempts to lock a row that is already locked, MapMarker follows the default behavior of the database. Usually this means waiting until that row is released. MapMarker does not use any deadlock detection beyond that provided by the database. Note: You are responsible for maintaining the relationship of the street address and the latitude/longitude for that address. For example, whenever you change any street address information, you must re-geocode that record. If rows are deleted from your table after MapMarker opens the table, MapMarker reports an error when it tries to geocode that deleted row. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 167

168 Geocoding Remote Tables Remote Database Views You may only geocode views of a remote table when you are doing a table-to-table geocode. See Writing Geocoding Output to Another Table on page 161, for more information. Rollback Segment Limit Be sure that you set your database rollback segment or temp space to be sufficiently large enough to accommodate the size of your database. Supported Unique Index and Primary Key Data Types by Database The following table identifies the supported data types by RDBMS. A Primary Key must also be defined for your table. Microsoft SQLServer Microsoft Access Oracle Char Character Character Float Number (double) Number Integer Number (Long Integer) Varchar SmallInt Number (Integer) Varchar2 Tinyint Number (Single) N/A Real N/A N/A Varchar N/A N/A If MapMarker encounters a mappable table with a spatial type it does not support, an error message is displayed and the table is not geocoded. For a list of ODBC databases supported by MapMarker (including Microsoft Access, Oracle, and SQL Server) see your product-specific MapMarker Release Notes. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 168

169 A A Frequently Asked Questions In this appendix: Q: I have a table that I cannot geocode because I get the error Unable to update row. What does this mean and how can I fix it? 170 Q: I open a table in MapInfo Professional and I am able to open that same table in MapMarker. Is this safe? 170 Q: How can I improve MapMarker performance? 170 Q: What determines if a row is unmatched? 170 Q: After geocoding, some of my records have a result code of ND. What does this mean? 171 Q: What is the significance of result codes, match codes, and location codes? 171 Q: What is the format of the Census Block code? 172 Q: When geocoding, how can I prevent firm names from matching to street names? 172 Q: What is the difference between the Desktop product and the Developer Product? 172

170 Frequently Asked Questions Frequently Asked Questions Q: I have a table that I cannot geocode because I get the error Unable to update row. What does this mean and how can I fix it? A: This error occurs when MapMarker attempts to create the point object for a given row and is unable to do so. To fix this problem, remove the map from the table, and use either MapMarker or MapInfo Professional to re-create the map file associated with the table. To use MapInfo Professional to remove the map file association, select Table > Maintenance > Table Structure from the menu, and clear the Table is Mappable check box. This causes the map to be dropped from the table and all the objects associated with the table to be removed. Alternatively, you can delete the MAP file associated with the table manually. After dropping the map, simply open the table with MapMarker and re-geocode the table. MapMarker automatically makes any table that you open mappable, and you are able to geocode the table without getting the error. Note that this error may also result from running out of disk space while geocoding with MapMarker. Q: I open a table in MapInfo Professional and I am able to open that same table in MapMarker. Is this safe? A: No. Avoid opening tables with MapMarker that are already open in MapInfo Professional. MapInfo Professional closes files that are not actively being used. Once MapInfo Professional has closed all the files associated with a table, MapMarker is able to open that same table, potentially causing a conflict between the two applications. Q: How can I improve MapMarker performance? A: Performance is improved by sorting the table to geocode by ZIP Codes. You can also improve performance by requiring an exact match on street names and/or ZIP Codes. Other things you can do include: Use the fastest processor available to you. Have enough memory so that the operating system can allocate some memory to your disk cache. Copy the Address Dictionary to your hard drive. Do not create points automatically. Q: What determines if a row is unmatched? A: Unmatched rows are those rows in your table that have a result code that is either blank or contains an N. These are the only rows that MapMarker attempts to match when you choose to geocode unmatched rows. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 170

171 Frequently Asked Questions Note that MapMarker does not remove points from table rows that it does not match. If a table contains pre-existing point objects, delete these objects before geocoding to ensure that your results accurately reflect your current geocoding session. If you have records for which you want to preserve pre-existing points, mark them as non-geocodable by putting the result code NG into the result code column. MapMarker does not attempt to match records with a result code of NG even if you choose to match all rows in a table. Q: After geocoding, some of my records have a result code of ND. What does this mean? A: ND stands for No Data: This means that the file containing the address matching data needed for that record was not found in your data path or that the area is not licensed. You get this result if you copy a subset of the MapMarker address dictionary to your local drive and attempt to geocode addresses that are outside of that area. Remember, you can include more than one directory in your MapMarker data path, and the path is searched in the order in which it appears. This means that you can move the twodigit ZIP Code files for New England to your local drive and leave the complete U.S. Address Dictionary on DVD-ROM. For example, your data path could be: c:\mydata\mapmarker\nedata;d:\data where c:\mapinfo\mapmarkr\nedata is the hard drive location of your New England data subset and d:\data is the Address Dictionary DVD-ROM. The path components are separated by a semicolon. Q: What is the significance of result codes, match codes, and location codes? A result code indicates the success or failure of the geocoding operation and conveys information about the quality of the match. These codes typically start with either S (street geocode), Z (postal geocode) or G (geographic geocode). Each character of the code indicates the level of precision of each address component matched. See Result Codes on page 97 for more information A match code indicates the parts of the address were matched (or what address parts were changed to achieve the match). A location code indicates the locational accuracy of the assigned geocode. Note that an accurately placed candidate is not necessarily an ideal candidate. Examine the match codes and result codes in addition to location codes to best evaluate the overall quality of the candidate. See Match Codes and Location Codes on page 266 for more information. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 171

172 Frequently Asked Questions Q: What is the format of the Census Block code? A: MapMarker can return the full 15-digit Census Block ID only for a successfully geocoded record with an S8, S7, S5 result code. An S4 can return a complete 15-character Census Block ID, but only if the block groups on each side of the street are the same and if a house number is provided. An S3 result can return no more than a 12-digit Census Block Group number. The complete Census Block ID code is as follows: SSCCCTTTTTTGBB(B) where S = State FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standard) code (2 characters) C = County FIPS code (3 characters) T = Census Tract (6 characters) G = Census Block Group (1 character) B = Census Block (typically 2 characters, sometimes 3). Q: When geocoding, how can I prevent firm names from matching to street names? A: One way to keep firm names from matching to street names is to require exact match on the house number. Because a firm name does not typically have an associated house number, MapMarker will not match the firm name input with a house number address. Therefore, you will not get a firm name matching to a street range. However, your data may have firm names and street names in the same columns or swapped. Therefore, MapMarker looks at both the firm name and the street address fields to try to determine the address. Firm names can be very close to a street names. For example, "Little Johns", "Albany NY 12203" could match to "Little Johns Pizza" or "1 Little John Rd" which are both in that ZIP Code. Neither one is an exact match to the input. In this case it would return a multiple match. In general, requiring an exact match on the house number produces more accurate geocoding. Not requiring this introduces a significant chance of positioning the point a distance from the real point. If MapMarker does not find the house number in a range for a street, it matches it to the closest one. Q: What is the difference between the Desktop product and the Developer Product? MapMarker can be licensed as a Desktop edition or Developer edition. The Desktop Edition includes the Desktop Application which includes the graphical user interface for geocoding addresses and the MapMarker Address Dictionary. You can purchase data for all 50 states (plus D.C. and Puerto Rico), regional state bundles, or individual state data. Note: The Desktop Application runs on Microsoft Windows only. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 172

173 Frequently Asked Questions The Developer edition includes the MapMarker Desktop Application and the tools necessary for developing MapMarker solutions. These tools include the MapMarker Java API, Javadocs, the REST API, native code libraries, and examples. A preconfigured Apache Tomcat servlet is provided to run MapMarker as a geocoding server. Reverse geocoding is available with the Developer (Server) edition only (not with the Desktop application). MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 173

174 B B MapMarker User Interface Reference This appendix has reference information for the various dialogs, buttons, and menu commands in the MapMarker user interface. In this appendix: MapMarker Menu Commands and Toolbar Buttons 175 MapMarker Dialogs 184

175 MapMarker User Interface Reference MapMarker Menu Commands and Toolbar Buttons This section describes the various buttons and menu commands in MapMarker and what they are used for. The topics are organized in alphabetical order by button/command name. Use the list below to locate the description of the button or menu command you wish to learn about. About MapMarker command on page 176 Arrange Icons command on page 176 Batch Add Attributes command on page 176 Cascade command on page 176 Choose Font command on page 177 Clear File Selections command on page 177 Close command on page 177 Close Project command on page 177 Create Batch File command on page 177 Create Project-based Batch File on page 177 Create/Save Project command on page 178 Exit command on page 178 Export to ESRI Shapefile on page 178 Geocode command on page 178 Help Topics command on page 179 Locate Airport command on page 179 Locate Highway Exit command on page 179 Logfile command on page 179 MapMarker on the World Wide Web command on page 180 Open Browser List command on page 180 Open ODBC Table command on page 180 Open Project command on page 180 Open Table command on page 181 Quick Find command on page 181 Quick Geocode command on page 181 Recent File List command on page 181 Select Attribute Files command on page 182 Select Columns command on page 182 Status Bar command on page 182 Stop Attribution command on page 182 Submit Problem Report to Technical Support command on page 183 MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 175

176 MapMarker User Interface Reference Summary command on page 183 System Preferences command on page 183 Table Summary command on page 183 Tile command on page 183 Toolbar command on page 184 About MapMarker command About MapMarker displays the About MapMarker message box. This message box has information about your copy of MapMarker, including the product version number, data vintage, copyright, legal, and licensing information and the serial number for the licensed user of the product. About MapMarker is available when MapMarker is running. To view your MapMarker information: On the Help menu, click About MapMarker. Arrange Icons command Arrange Icons arranges all minimized browser windows into rows along the bottom of the MapMarker workspace. Arrange Icons is always available when MapMarker is running and there is at least one table open. To arrange your minimized windows: On the Window menu, click Arrange Icons. Batch Add Attributes command Batch Add Attributes allows you to add attributes from one table to another without geocoding the table at the same time. Batch Add Attributes is available when a table is open, input and output columns for geocoding have been selected, and the attribute table(s) have been identified. To use Batch Add Attributes: On the Table menu, point to Add Attributes, and then click Batch Add Attributes. Cascade command Cascade arranges open windows in an overlapping pattern so that the title bar of each window is visible. Cascade is always available when MapMarker is running and there is at least one table open. To cascade your open windows: On the Window menu, click Cascade. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 176

177 MapMarker User Interface Reference Choose Font command Choose Font allows you to select a font, font style and font size for the text in the Browser window. Choose Font is always active when MapMarker is running. To choose font settings: In the Options menu, click Choose Font. Clear File Selections command Clear File Selections deletes the attribute settings stored in a table s metadata. Clear File Selections is available when a table is open and attribute settings exist. To delete a table s attribute settings: In the Table menu, point to Add Attributes, and then click Clear File Selections. Close command Close allows you to close a table. Close is available when at least one table is open. To close a table, do one of the following: In the File menu, click Close. Click in the table window. Close Project command To close a project, do the following: In the File menu, click Projects, then Open Projects. Create Batch File command Create Batch File allows you to save a text file containing instructions for MapMarker to carry out a batch geocoding session. Create Batch File is available when at least one table is open. To create a batch file, do one of the following: In the Table menu, click Create Batch File. Click the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu, then click Create Batch File. Create Project-based Batch File Create Project-based Batch File allows you to create MapMarker projects (PROJ) files and to batch geocode TXT files (delimited or fixed-width). Batch geocoding of a TXT file can only be done by done through a project. To create a project-based batch file, do one of the following: MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 177

178 MapMarker User Interface Reference On the File menu, click Create/Project-based Batch File. Click the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu, then click Create/Projectbased Batch File. Create/Save Project command Create/Save Project allows you to save a MapMarker project file with all saved geocoding settings, column mappings, table attributes settings, and some system preferences. These project file settings will be used when the project is re-opened with the Open Project command. The project file settings override any of the existing metadata settings in the TAB file. To save a project file, do the following: 1. In the File menu, click Projects, then Create/Save Project. 2. In the Save Project File As dialog box, type a name for the project. A PROJ file extension is used. Exit command Exit allows you to quit MapMarker. Exit is active when MapMarker is running. To exit MapMarker, do one of the following: In the File menu, click Exit. Click in the MapMarker window. Export to ESRI Shapefile The Export to ESRI Shapefile command allows you to export TAB, DBF, CSV, and TXT files to ESRI Shapefile (SHP) format. To export to ESRI Shapefile, do the following: 1. In the Table Menu, click Export to ESRI Shapefile. (A table must already be open.) 2. In the Export To dialog, select a file name for export. The SHP file extension is automatically selected for ESRI Shapefiles. 3. In the Export to ESRI Shape dialog, select the columns or points that contain the geometry information and click Export. Geocode command Use Geocode to specify the geocoding settings you want to use, including run type (automatic or interactive geocoding), street-level or ZIP Code centroid match, match settings, fallback settings, and CASS geocoding setup. Geocode is available when a table is open and you have selected the input and output columns for that table. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 178

179 MapMarker User Interface Reference To specify your geocoding settings, do one of the following: In the Table menu, click Geocode. Click In the MapMarker toolbar. Click the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu, then click Geocode. Help Topics command Help Topics displays the main entry topic for the MapMarker Online Help system. Help Topics is always available when MapMarker is running. To display the online Help, do one of the following: In the Help menu, click Help Topics. Press the F1 key for a command or dialog for which you need more information. Click in a dialog. Click and then click a toolbar button or menu command in the MapMarker window. Locate Airport command Airport Locator is a search tool you can use when you need to find one airport or all airports within one state. Airport Locator is available when MapMarker is running. To use Airport Locator: In the Search menu, click Locate Airport. Click the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu, then click Locate Airport. Locate Highway Exit command Locate Highway Exit is a search tool you can use when you need to find the location of an exit ramp for a specified highway. Locate Highway Exit is available when MapMarker is running. To use Locate Highway Exit: In the Search menu, click Locate Highway Exit. Click the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu, then click Locate Highway Exit. Logfile command Logfile displays the log file in a text editor where you can view the results and chosen settings of the current geocoding session. Logfile is available after geocoding a table. To view the log file, do one of the following: In the View menu, click Logfile. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 179

180 MapMarker User Interface Reference Select Automatically open log file after geocoding in the Log File tab of the Geocode dialog. MapMarker on the World Wide Web command MapMarker on the World Wide Web opens your default Web browser and displays the MapMarker home page on the World Wide Web. Once there, you can access the latest information about MapMarker, download related files, and search the MapMarker Knowledge Base for helpful information. MapMarker on the World Wide Web is available in the Help menu when MapMarker is running. To visit the MapMarker home page: In the Help menu, click MapMarker on the World Wide Web. Note: You must have a Web browser installed on your system and have access to the Internet to use this feature. Open Browser List command The Open Browser List shows a list of filenames for all open tables within MapMarker. The Open Browser List is active when at least one table is open in MapMarker. To use the Open Browser List: In the Window menu, click the filename of the table to view. Open ODBC Table command Open ODBC Table allows you to specify which remote table you want to open in MapMarker. MapMarker supports remote tables in MS Access, Oracle, and SQL Server formats. Open ODBC Table is available when MapMarker is running, and is unavailable if there is already a local table open. To open a remote table, do one of the following: In the File menu, click Open ODBC Table. Click on the MapMarker toolbar. Open Project command Open Project allows you to open a MapMarker project file with all saved geocoding settings, column mappings, table attributes settings, and some system preferences. These project file settings override any of the existing metadata settings in the TAB file. To open a project file, do the following: 1. In the File menu, click Projects, then Open Projects. 2. Navigate to the folder that contains projects (PROJ file extension), select the project file and click Open. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 180

181 MapMarker User Interface Reference The project file is created with the Create/Save Project command. Open Table command Open Table allows you to open a local MapInfo table (TAB file), dbase (DBF). comma-delimited (CSV), or text (TXT) file. table in preparation for geocoding. Open Table is available when MapMarker is running. To open a table, do one of the following: In the File menu, click Open Table. Click on the MapMarker toolbar. Click the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu, then click Open Table. Quick Find command Quick Find is a search tool you can use to find or confirm one address at a time. Quick Find is active when MapMarker is running. To use Quick Find, do one of the following: In the Search menu, click Quick Find. Click on the MapMarker toolbar. Click the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu, then click Quick Find. Quick Geocode command Quick Geocode allows you to immediately proceed to geocoding when you open a table in MapMarker. MapMarker uses the system and table settings from the table's metadata as its matching criteria. The type of geocoding pass done (automatic or interactive) is the same as the last geocoding pass made In the table. For example, if you previously geocoded in interactive mode, Quick Geocode then geocodes in interactive mode until you change the geocode preference to automatic. Quick Geocode is available when at least one table is open and that table has previously been geocoded. To use Quick Geocode, do one of the following: In the Table menu, click Quick Geocode. Click on the MapMarker toolbar. Click the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu, then click Quick Geocode. Recent File List command The Recent File List is a shortcut method you can use to access tables you have previously opened in MapMarker. The names of up to the last four opened tables are listed toward the bottom of the File menu. The Recent File List is available when at least one table has been opened and closed in the current MapMarker session. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 181

182 MapMarker User Interface Reference To use the Recent File List: In the File menu, click the filename of the table you want to open. Select Attribute Files command Select Attribute Files allows you to specify the table of attributes you want to connect to your geocoding table. The attribute table can be local or remote. The table you are geocoding, however, must be local, unless that table uses a different table for output. Select Attribute Tables is available when at least one table is open. To select attribute files: In the Table menu, point to Add Attributes, and then click Select Attribute Files. Select Columns command Select Columns allows you to specify the input address columns that MapMarker uses to match your records against its Address Dictionary when geocoding your table. Select Columns is available when a table is open. To use Select Columns, do one of the following: In the Table menu, click Select Columns. Click on the MapMarker toolbar. Click the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu, then click Select Columns. Status Bar command Status Bar shows or hides the status bar at the bottom of the MapMarker window. The status bar is visible when the Status Bar command is checked. To show or hide the MapMarker status bar: In the View menu, click Status Bar. Stop Attribution command Stop Attribution stops the addition of attributes from another table. It instructs MapMarker to do the next geocoding pass in the normal way. It does not stop attribution during a geocoding or batch attribution operation. Stop Attribution is available when a table is open and attribute settings exist. To stop attribution: In the Table menu, point to Add Attributes, and then click Stop Attribution. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 182

183 MapMarker User Interface Reference Submit Problem Report to Technical Support command Submit Problem Report to Technical Support opens your default Web browser and displays a problem report form on the World Wide Web. Once there, you can submit your MapMarker problem report. You can submit a problem report to Technical Support from the Help menu when MapMarker is running. To submit a problem report: In the Help menu, click Submit Problem Report to Pitney Bowes Technical Support. This link submits a problem report. Note: You must have a Web browser installed on your system and have access to the Internet to use this feature. Summary command Summary displays the results of the previous geocoding pass. Summary is available after geocoding a table. To view a geocoding summary: In the View menu, click Summary. System Preferences command System Preferences allows you to set system-wide preferences that relate to starting MapMarker, setting the Address Dictionary path(s), offset distances for geocoded points, and location of the street maps for candidate mapping. System Preferences is always active when MapMarker is running. To change system preferences, do one of the following: In the Options menu, click System Preferences. Click on the MapMarker toolbar. Click the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu, then click System Preferences. Table Summary command Table Summary generates a report providing statistics about the number and type of geocodes for a table, provided the table contains a georesult column. Table Summary is available when a table is open that contains a georesult column. To create a table summary: In the Table menu, click Table Summary. Tile command Tile arranges open windows side by side so that all windows are visible. Tile is always active when MapMarker is running and there is at least one table open. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 183

184 MapMarker User Interface Reference To tile your open windows: In the Window menu, click Tile. Toolbar command Toolbar shows or hides the MapMarker toolbar. The MapMarker toolbar is visible when the Toolbar command is checked. To show or hide the MapMarker toolbar: In the View menu, click Toolbar. MapMarker Dialogs This section describes the dialogs in MapMarker and what they are used for. The topics are organized in alphabetical order by dialog name. Use the list below to locate the description of the dialog you wish to learn about. About MapMarker dialog on page 185 Add Columns dialog on page 186 Automatic Geocode dialog on page 187 Bind Attribute Table Columns to Output Columns dialog on page 188 Candidate Map dialog on page 189 Describe Table Relationships dialog on page 192 Dictionary Preferences dialog on page 193 Export to dialog on page 194 Export to ESRI Shapefile on page 178 Fallback dialog on page 196 Filter Tables dialog on page 197 Font dialog on page 198 Geocode dialog on page 199 Geocoding Summary dialog on page 201 GeoResult Code dialog on page 202 Interactive Geocode dialog on page 203 Locate Airport dialog on page 206 Locate Highway Exit dialog on page 207 Location Code dialog on page 209 Log File dialog on page 210 Maps Preferences dialog on page 211 Match Code Dialog on page 212 Match Settings dialog on page 213 MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 184

185 MapMarker User Interface Reference Modify Table Structure dialog on page 217 Multiple Match dialog on page 218 Offset Preferences dialog on page 219 Open Project command on page 180 Open Table dialog on page 221 Quick Find dialog on page 223 Quick Find Settings dialog on page 225 Related Table dialog on page 229 Save As dialog on page 229 Save Table Summary As dialog on page 231 Select Attribute Tables dialog on page 231 Select input columns from your table dialog on page 233 Select output columns from your table dialog on page 235 Select Project Files dialog on page 237 Select Table dialog on page 238 Select Table Type dialog on page 239 Startup Preferences dialog on page 239 Table Georesult Summary dialog on page 241 Text File Wizard (Step 1 of 3) on page 242 Text File Wizard (Step 2 of 3) on page 243 Text File Wizard (Step 3 of 3) on page 244 About MapMarker dialog The About MapMarker message box displays information about your copy of MapMarker, including the version number, data vintages, and legal and licensing notices. Software and data expiration information also appears (for example, the number of days remaining before your data expires). Tech Support Copyrigh t Close Click to view technical support information. Click to view the product copyright information. Click OK to close the dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 185

186 MapMarker User Interface Reference Add Columns dialog The Add Columns dialog appears when you open a table within MapMarker that does not contain one or more of the following columns: Latitude, Longitude, and GeoResult. This dialog prompts you to select which columns to add to your table. Columns you select are added to your table when it opens within MapMarker. Add Latitude and Longitude columns (optional) Add Latitude column Add Longitude column Add GeoResult column (recommended) OK Cancel Help Click this check box to add latitude and longitude columns to your table. Click this check box to add a latitude column to your table. Click this check box to add a longitude column to your table. Click this check box to add a georesult column to your table. Invokes the settings and closes the dialog. The settings are saved in the table s metadata until you clear them. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Displays help for this dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 186

187 MapMarker User Interface Reference Automatic Geocode dialog The Automatic Geocode dialog appears after you complete an automatic geocoding pass. This dialog summarizes the progress of your geocoding pass, noting the following types of information: Match Type Rows Percent Matched No Match Previous Match Indicates number of rows successfully matched. Indicates number of rows not matched. Indicates number of rows geocoded in previous geocoding sessions. Indicates percent of rows successfully matched. Indicates percent of rows not matched. Indicates percent of rows geocoded in previous geocoding sessions. Percent Complete Stop Done Indicates the percentage of the geocoding process completed, based on how much of the table is being geocoded. Click Stop to interrupt the geocoding process. When MapMarker completes the geocoding pass on the table, Stop changes to Done. Click Done to return to the MapMarker workspace. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 187

188 MapMarker User Interface Reference Bind Attribute Table Columns to Output Columns dialog The Bind Attribute Table Columns to Output Columns dialog allows you to control the attribution operation, including how the attribution table and geocoding tables are related and where MapMarker stores the attributes in the output table. Attribute Table Name Join Information Group Join Using Output Point Column Value Attribute Table Column Output Table Column Lists the attribute table(s) you set in the Select Attribute Tables dialog. This portion of the dialog tells MapMarker how the geocoding and attribute tables are related. Use the options in this group to specify how to join attribute and output tables. Tells MapMarker to make the connection between the attribute and output tables by geography. The geocoded point in your table is compared with the geography in the attribute table. Requires the attribute table to have a MAP component file. Also requires the geocoding table to store the longitude and latitude values. This type of link between attribute and output tables is based on matching columns. When this option is chosen the attribute table and output table columns lists become available. Lists the indexed columns in the attribute table available for matching against the output columns in your geocoding table. Lists the output columns available for matching to an indexed attribute column. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 188

189 MapMarker User Interface Reference Characters used in comparison Bind Information Group Type/Attribute List Box Type/Output Column List Box Modify/Add Columns Bind to Column Unbind Column OK Back Cancel Help The number of characters that MapMarker uses to compare attribute and output columns to make an exact match. The lower half of the dialog is where you identify the attributes you want added to your geocoding table and which columns to place them in. Lists the type and names of attribute fields contained in the attribute table. Lists the type and column name of the output column where you want the attribute information stored. Click to access the Modify Table Structure dialog and add a new column to the table or modify an existing column. Links to the highlighted attribute column and the output column. Uncouples the highlighted attribute column and the output column. Invokes the settings and closes the dialog. The settings are saved in the table s metadata until you clear them. Returns you to the Select Attribute Tables dialog. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Displays help on this dialog. Candidate Map dialog MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 189

190 MapMarker User Interface Reference The Candidate Map dialog appears when you click Map in the Interactive Geocode, Quick Find, or Locate Highway Exit dialogs. Candidate Map displays a street map for the vicinity of the match candidates MapMarker has returned for a record. Use the Candidate map to help you decide the best match for your record. You can view match candidates for street addresses, ZIP Code centroids and street intersections. Map Tools The map window shows the match candidates and the underlying street layers that you set in Map Preferences dialog. Each candidate is identified by a color-coded star and address label. The star represents the type of geocoding accuracy you would get if you selected that candidate as a match. Magenta stars: all records matched to a single address point. No interpolation is required (S8 result code) Orange stars: all records geocoded an interpolated point along the candidate s street segment (S7 result code) Green stars: all records geocoded to a street address (S5 and M5 result codes) Blue stars: All records geocoded to a shape path centroid (S4, M4 result codes) Yellow stars: All records geocoded to a ZIP + 4 centroid (S3, M3 and Z3 result codes) Cyan stars: All records geocoded to a ZIP + 2 centroid (S2, M2 and Z2 result codes) Red stars: All records geocoded to a ZIP Code centroid, including highway exits (S1, M1 and Z1 result codes) Purple stars: All records geocoded to point ZIP locations (S6, M6 and Z6 result codes) Maroon stars: records offset a specified distance along the perpendicular between the original point to the associated street segment. (SC result code). Black stars: All records geocoded to intersections (Mx and Sx result codes) Black circles: all records geocoded to a city geographic centroid (G1 result code) Red circles: all records geocoded to a county geographic centroid (G2 result code) Blue circles: all records geocoded to a state geographic centroid (G3 result code) Lists the tools available to assist in displaying and navigating the candidate map. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 190

191 MapMarker User Interface Reference Select Pan Label Zoom In Zoom Out Default View Zoom Level (miles) X,Y Coordinates OK Cancel Help An arrow cursor that allows you to select a candidate that you determine is the best match for your input address. A hand cursor that allows you to move the map for a different view. A crosshair cursor that allows to label any map feature, such as streets and highways, to help you identify the surrounding area and choose the appropriate match. The candidates display in the map with labels by default. A plus-sign cursor that allows you to change the map display to a more local view. To zoom-in, click on the map. A minus-sign cursor that expands the viewable area of the map. Returns the map to the original view of all match candidates visible on the map. Indicates the zoom level the map is displayed at, measured in miles. Shows the longitude and latitude coordinates, respectively, for the location under the cursor. As you move the cursor around the map the coordinates change appropriately. Carries out the selection operation, if any, and closes the dialog. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Displays help on this dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 191

192 MapMarker User Interface Reference Describe Table Relationships dialog The Describe Table Relationships dialog allows you to create links between a remote source table and a local results table. This is part of the procedure for geocoding a remote table and writing the results to a related table. Input Table Columns Output Table Keys Selected Input Keys Selected Output Keys OK Cancel Help Lists the columns in the source table. Lists the columns in the results table. Lists the input keys that correspond to a specific output key. Lists the output keys that correspond to a specific input key. Up to six key combinations can be listed for a table. Invokes the settings and closes the dialog. The settings are saved in the table s metadata until you clear them. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Displays help on this dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 192

193 MapMarker User Interface Reference Dictionary Preferences dialog The Dictionary Preferences dialog allows you to specify the type of data dictionary you want MapMarker to use, and to specify the location of that data dictionary. Use MapMarker Address Dictionary Path Use User Defined Dictionary Click this check box to use the Address Dictionary. These can include the standard street address MapMarker USA 29 address dictionary that covers the entire U.S. or a point level dataset (TomTom Points, Centrus Points, NAVTEQ Point Addressing). Specify the path for the MapMarker Address Dictionary. Click Browse to identify the current Address Dictionary path and other Address Dictionary paths you want MapMarker to search. The path(s) reflects all address dictionaries included with your installation. When adding additional paths to the list, separate each by a semicolon. Click this check box to use a User Dictionary. This is a customized dictionary that contains additional street address information that is not included in the MapMarker Address Dictionary. If you wish to use a customized dictionary, check this box and type in the name of the file. Alternatively, click Browse to browse to the location. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 193

194 MapMarker User Interface Reference Path Use Address Point Interpolation OK Cancel Apply Help Specify the path for the User Dictionary(s). These userdefined databases contain the address information MapMarker will use to set the x and y coordinates for your records. Click Browse to identify the current User Dictionary path and other User Dictionary paths you wish MapMarker to search. Select this check box to use address point interpolation when you geocode. Address point interpolation enables records to be geocoded in relation to any address point candidates that are available in the output. Using a customized dictionary that contains address point data gives the best results. Closes the dialog and saves the changes that you have made. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Applies the settings that you specified. Displays help on the dialog. Export to dialog The Save As dialog appears when you select after you open a TAB, CSV, delimited text (TXT), or DBF file and select Table > Export to ESRI Shapefile. Use it to name a SHP file when you are exporting to Shapefile format. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 194

195 MapMarker User Interface Reference Export to ESRI Shapefile dialog The Export to ESRI Shapefile dialog allows you to export TAB, DBF, CSV, and TXT files to ESRI Shapefile (SHP) format. Use Point Geometry Use X/Y Coordinate Columns Long (X) Lat (Y) Export Cancel Help Specify that the geometry information will come from points on a mappable table. Specify that the geometry information will come from Longitude / Latitude columns. Use the drop-down list to choose the column that contains the Longitude geometry. Use the drop-down list to choose the column that contains the Latitude geometry. Click Export to begin the export to SHP format. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Displays online help for this dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 195

196 MapMarker User Interface Reference Fallback dialog The Fallback dialog allows you to specify if you want MapMarker to geocode to a ZIP Code centroid or to a Geographic centroid it no close match is found at street level. Fallback to ZIP Centroid ZIP, ZIP + 2 or ZIP + 4 Centroid ZIP + 2 or ZIP + 4 Centroid Only ZIP + 4 Centroid Only Fallback to Geographic Centroid Geocode Click this check box when you want to fall back to ZIP Code centroid matching. Click this option if you want to fall back to either the ZIP centroid, the ZIP + 2 centroid, or the ZIP + 4 centroid. This option geocodes to a less specific point than other ZIP fallback options, and is also less specific than geocoding to street level. Click this option if you want to fall back to either the ZIP + 2 centroid or the ZIP + 4 centroid. This option can potentially geocode to a less specific point than the ZIP + 4 Centroid Only fallback option, and is also less specific than geocoding to street level. Click this option if you want to fall back to the ZIP + 4 centroid only. This option geocodes to a more specific point than other ZIP fallback options, but is less specific than geocoding to street level. Click this option if you want to fall back to a state, county, or city centroid. These are not very specific geocoding options, but may be suitable for certain applications. Begins the geocoding operation. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 196

197 MapMarker User Interface Reference Cancel Apply Help Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Applies the settings that you specified. Displays online help for this dialog. Filter Tables dialog Use the options in this dialog to control what types of tables to display in the Select Table dialog. Show Tables System Tables Views Synonyms/Alias es OK Cancel Help Shows which types of tables to display in the Select Table dialog. Click this check box to display non-system tables in the Select Table dialog. Click this check box to display system tables in the Select Table dialog. Click this check box to display view tables in the Select Table dialog. Note: MapMarker supports Views only if you are geocoding a table and writing the outputs to another table. Click this check box to display synonym/alias tables in the Select Table dialog. Carries out the operation and closes the dialog. Cancels the settings and closes the dialog. Displays help on using this dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 197

198 MapMarker User Interface Reference Font dialog The Font dialog appears when you click Options > Choose Font. Use the Font dialog to set fonts for your table in the Browser window. Font Font Style Size Sample Script OK Cancel Help In the Font list, click the font type from the scroll list. Choose the font style from the scroll list. Choose the font size from the scroll list. Displays a sample of the font using the selected font style and size. In the Script list, click the font script that is appropriate for the font you want to use based on your computer s default language setting. Click OK to apply the font changes you specify and closes the dialog. Click Cancel to close the dialog without saving or applying your font changes. Click Help to display online help for this dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 198

199 MapMarker User Interface Reference Geocode dialog The Geocode dialog allows you to select a variety of preferences that control the method, precision, range, and levels of geocoding. Use this dialog to set options for the current geocoding operation. Table Geocode Precision Street Level Method To ZIP Centroid To Geographic Centroid Range to Geocode Search City Displays the name of the table to be geocoded. Geocode to the specified level of precision (street level, ZIP centroid or Geographic Centroid). Geocode to street level. Choose from automatic (default) or interactive. Geocode to the centroid of a ZIP Code. This is faster than street level geocoding. Geocode to the centroid of the geography (state, county, or city). These are not very specific geocoding options, but may be suitable for certain applications. Use the options in this group to specify which rows in your table to geocode. Limits the search to the specified city. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 199

200 MapMarker User Interface Reference Search Finance Area Expanded Search Search Distance in Miles Limit to State All Rows Row Numbers Types of Rows to Geocode Unmatched All Types GeoResult less than Matched OutStreet Case Return Street Output in Mixed Letter Case Configure Attribution Searches the entire Finance Area for possible streets. A Finance Area may include more than one city of ZIP Code. If you are using CASS mode, the Finance Area constraint is enabled by default. Searches for an address within a given radius (miles) of the input address. If Expanded Search is selected, you can specify the distance (up to 99 miles) from the input address that MapMarker will search. If Expanded Search is selected, you can limit the expanded search to the same state of the input address, regardless of the mile radius. Geocode the entire table. Geocode a specific block of rows in your table. Enter the row number range in the text boxes below this option. Type the starting row number for the range in the first text box and the end row number for the range in the second text box. Use the options in this group to specify which table rows within the range you specified in Range to Geocode you want to geocode. Geocode all unmatched rows (rows for which the GeoResult field: blank or N). Geocode all rows. Geocode rows by match precision. Use the drop-down list to choose the georesult code with the highest precision for which you want to geocode. Only use this option with a table that has already been geocoded. If you use this selection with a table that has not been geocoded, MapMarker geocodes all of the rows regardless of this selection. Use the option in this group to specify the character case of the street output. Click this check box to have MapMarker write the output street in mixed case (for example, 12 Front St.). Displays the Bind Attribute Table Columns to Output Columns dialog. This begin the process of attribution binding. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 200

201 MapMarker User Interface Reference Geocode Cancel Apply Help Begins the geocoding operation. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Applies the settings that you specified. Displays help on this dialog. Geocoding Summary dialog The Geocoding Summary dialog appears at the end of an interactive geocoding pass. The Geocoding Summary dialog lists the results of the latest geocoding pass, including the number of new matches, unmatched records and previously matched records. Matched No Match Previous Match Total Rows Indicates number of rows successfully matched. Indicates number of rows not matched. Indicates number of rows geocoded in previous geocoding sessions. Indicates total number of unmatched rows, entire table or block of rows examined. Percent Indicates percent of rows successfully matched. Indicates percent of rows not matched. Indicates percent of rows geocoded in previous geocoding sessions. Indicates total percent of rows examined. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 201

202 MapMarker User Interface Reference GeoResult Code dialog The GeoResult Code tab of the Status Codes dialog shows candidate information and match details for each record. To display this dialog, double-click on the result code in the Georesult column of your output table. This behavior is available after you have completed a geocoding pass or selected a previously geocoded table. It is not available when you initially open a table. You can also display this dialog by right-clicking a candidate in the candidate list and selecting Show Status Code Details. For more information on the contents of this dialog, see Displaying Result Codes and Matching Details on page 105. Select the appropriate tab to see detailed information on the Georesult code, Match Code, or Location Code. Street Address Zip Code Result code Displays the street address for the record you are viewing georesult information. Displays the ZIP Code for the record you are viewing georesult information for Displays the result code for the record you are viewing georesult information MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 202

203 MapMarker User Interface Reference Match type Match details Describes the type of match made while geocoding the record and to what level the record was geocoded. Indicates the criteria used in determining the match. Interactive Geocode dialog The Interactive Geocode dialog appears when the Interactive option is selected in the Geocode dialog. This dialog displays unmatched records one at a time and a list of suggested matches (if any). Click Geocode to accept the match or click Ignore to move to the next ungeocoded record. Summary Matched No match Previous match Percent complete Geocoding result The summary reflects the percentage of new matches, unmatched and previously matched records. Indicates percent of rows successfully matched. Indicates percent of rows not matched. Indicates percent of rows geocoded in previous geocoding sessions. A progress bar that updates the match count after each record. Displays the results of geocoding for that record (for example no matches found, unknown address). MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 203

204 MapMarker User Interface Reference Input Address Row indicator Firm Street Street2 City State ZIP Code Plus 4 Write indicated address to Input Fields on Geocode Search Level: Finance Area This group displays (for viewing and editing) the address to be geocoded. This drop-down list displays the name of the column that contains the row numbers for the table. Row numbers are shown to the right of this list during interactive geocoding, provided there are valid row numbers to display. The name of the business residing at the address. The primary street address. The secondary street address (for example, an apartment or post office box number). The full city name. The abbreviated state code (for example, NY for New York). The five-digit ZIP Code. The four digit extension to the ZIP Code. After editing a record, check this box to add the changes you made to the record s address information into your table upon clicking Geocode. Note: The existing input address is overwritten with your changes. Searches the entire Finance Area for possible streets. A Finance Area may include more than one city of ZIP Code. If you are using CASS mode, the Finance Area constraint is enabled by default. Search Level: City Limits the search to the specified city. This is the default for all modes except CASS mode. Search Level: Expanded Distance in miles Limit to current state Check this box to increase the probability of a match by expanding the search area in which MapMarker checks for a match. This helps to find a match when the input address contains limited or inaccurate city or ZIP Code information. If you selected Expanded Search, you can specify in miles (up to 99) for the search radius. If you selected Expanded Search, you can limit the expanded search to the same state indicated in the input address. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 204

205 MapMarker User Interface Reference Candidate list Search Options Ranges Map Close Help Back Next Geocode Displays possible matches or multiple close matches. The top candidate is highlighted by default. The result code, match code, and location code appear followed by the business name (firm) and address. You can also right-click a candidate and select Show Status Code Details. This displays the Status Codes dialog with tabs for GeoResult Code, Match Code, and Locational Code. See GeoResult Code dialog, Match Code Dialog, and Location Code dialog for details. Scroll horizontally to see additional information including coordinates and DataSource name. See Match Candidate List on page 131 for a detailed description of the candidate columns. The same candidate list appears for both Quick Find results and interactive geocoded results. Click to re-geocode a record after you have changed a constraint or option or after you have edited the input address. Click to change the matching conditions for the displayed record. Click to display a detailed list of address ranges for the highlighted street. The records are geocoded to the selected range. By default, MapMarker displays the range that most closely matches the input address. Displays a map showing all match candidates for the input address. This button is active when you have previously set the location of your street data in the Maps Preferences dialog. Stops the interactive geocoding session and closes the dialog. Displays help on this dialog. Click to go back to previous records to re-geocode. This is helpful to re-check previous geocoding decisions or to redo previous interactive geocodes. Click to leave the record ungeocoded and skip to next unmatched record. Click to geocode the specified match candidate if you agree that it is the correct match for your record. MapMarker assigns the coordinates from that record and moves on to display the next unmatched record in your file. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 205

206 MapMarker User Interface Reference Locate Airport dialog Use the Locate Airport dialog to search for location information for a specified airport, using the airport code or state abbreviation as your search criteria. Airport Code or State Abbreviation Search Clear Field Type the airport code or abbreviated state code in which you want to search for airports. Click to search for airports matching your input criteria. Click to clear the Airport Code of State Abbreviation text box. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 206

207 MapMarker User Interface Reference Search Results Airport List Close Help Displays the number of records matching your search criteria. In the event of an unsuccessful search, one of three messages appears: Invalid state or location code. The airport or state code you searched on did not contain at least two alpha-numeric characters. Re-type the airport or state code, using two characters if searching by state, or three to four characters if searching by airport code. Invalid state code. The two-character code you searched on did not match a valid state code. Type the correct state code to search for all airports in the state or type the complete three- or four-character airport code to search for a specific airport. No matching records found. The three- or four-character code you searched on did not match a valid airport code. Type the correct airport code to search for the airport or type a state code to search for all airports in the indicated state. Displays a list of all airport candidates matching your search criteria, organized alphabetically by airport code. Click to close this dialog. Displays online help for this dialog. Locate Highway Exit dialog MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 207

208 MapMarker User Interface Reference Use the Locate Highway Exit dialog to search for location information for a specified highway exit, using the highway name, exit, and state as your search criteria. Highway Exit State Search Clear Fields Search Results Map Close Help Type the highway name and direction (for example, I-90 E or Interstate 90 East) for which you want to search for an exit location. Type the exit number and/or the exit name (for example, Exit 2 to Washington Ave) for which you want to find location information. Type the state in which the exit exits (for example, NY for New York). Click to search for highway exits matching your input criteria. Click to clear the Highway, Exit, and State text boxes. Displays the records matching your search criteria. Displays a map showing all match candidates for the input address. This button is active when you have previously set the location of your street data in the Maps Preferences dialog. This button is active only when you look for a match via Search. Click to close this dialog. Displays online help for this dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 208

209 MapMarker User Interface Reference Location Code dialog The Location Code dialog of the Status Codes shows the location code with details on the meaning of the code and how the code was generated. You can double-click a candidate s location code in the Locationcode column of an output table. See Displaying Result Codes and Matching Details on page 105 for a sample output table that illustrates the Georesult, Matchcode, and Locationcode columns. You can also display this dialog by right-clicking a candidate in the candidate list and selecting Show Status Code Details. For more information on the contents of this dialog, see Displaying Location Code Details on page 107. For a complete list of location codes, see Location Codes on page 274. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 209

210 MapMarker User Interface Reference Log File dialog The Log File dialog allows you to set up a log file to track your matching conditions, geocoding results and other settings. Update Log File Automatically open log file after geocoding Specify Log File Name Geocode Cancel Apply Help Check to have MapMarker update the log file for each geocoding session. Information about the session appears at the top of the file. Check the box to view the log file after MapMarker completes a geocoding run. Check the box and specify the name of the log file. The default is table.log, where table is the root name of the topmost opened table. If you do not specify a file name, the geocoding information is written to a file named Mapmarkr.log that is found in the MapMarker program directory after the geocoding pass. Begins the geocoding operation. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Applies the settings that you specified. Displays help on this dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 210

211 MapMarker User Interface Reference Maps Preferences dialog To see the Maps Preferences dialog, select Options > System Preferences and select the Maps tab. Use this dialog to set the location and layer choices of the street data to display in the Candidate Map. Street Table Data Location Street Table Layer Configuration Add Remove Add All Specify the path for the MapMarker Streets, StreetInfo or StreetPro data set. Click Browse to navigate to the location instead of typing it in. You do not need to specify particular files to be opened. Choose the layers you want to see in the candidate map from the Available Layers list. Adds any highlighted layer in the Available Layers list to the Layers to Use list. Removes any highlighted layer from the Layers to Use list. Adds all layers from the Available Layers list to the Layers to Use list. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 211

212 MapMarker User Interface Reference Remove All Candidate Visualization OK Cancel Apply Help Removes all items in the Layers to Use list. Sets the maximum zoom distance for the candidate map. Default setting is 5 miles. Invokes and saves the settings. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Applies the settings that you specified. Displays help on this dialog. Match Code Dialog The Match Code tab of the Status Codes shows the match code with details on the meaning of the code and how the code was generated. You can double-click a candidate s match code in the Matchcode column of an output table. Match code information will appear if you map the appropriate output columns. See Select output columns from your table dialog on page 235. You can also display this dialog by right-clicking a candidate in the candidate list and selecting Show Status Code Details. For more information on the contents of this dialog, see Displaying Match Code Details on page 106. For a complete list of match codes, see Match Codes on page 267. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 212

213 MapMarker User Interface Reference Match Settings dialog The Match Settings dialog allows you to adjust the match settings you require for your geocoding session. Match Modes Standard Tight Relaxed Enables Standard match mode. This is the default mode, and generally provides the best balance of accurate geocoding, few false matches, and high performance. This requires a close (not necessarily exact) street name match. Enables Tight match mode. This uses the most strict matching rules and requires an exact street name match. In general, this returns the fewest number of candidates in the fastest processing time. There will be fewer non-close matches than are returned in Standard or Relaxed mode. Enables Relaxed match mode. This provides less strict matching rules. In general, Relaxed mode increases your chances of getting a close match but performance (geocoding speed) may not be as good. It also is more likely to return false positive candidates. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 213

214 MapMarker User Interface Reference CASS Custom (Exact Match On) House number Street name This provides strict conformity to USPS CASS regulations for CASS software. Use CASS mode to standardize your input for mailing. If you select CASS Mode, several other options are disabled and their values are overwritten by CASS rules. CASS mode requires a close name match. Unlike other modes, CASS does not match intersection addresses, building name, or street aliases. CASS also does not match based on a user dictionary or any data source that does not have USPS equivalent records. CASS Mode also enables the option to Produce a CASS Report See CASS related Selections. Custom allows you to select any combination of Exact Match constraints rather than relying on any of the match mode algorithms. This gives you very precise control over the matching. If you wish to specify exact match conditions, select Custom (Exact Match On) to activate these choices. clear or check the appropriate check box in the group. For example, clearing the House Number box and checking Street Name and ZIP Code means that MapMarker matches your record to the closest house number for the exact street in that ZIP Code it finds in the Address Dictionary. When the House Number box is checked, candidate house numbers must be exactly matched to return a close match. When the House Number box is unchecked, MapMarker can make a close match even if the house number match is not exact. When the Street Name box is checked, candidate street names must be exactly matched to get a geocoding match. When the street name box is unchecked, MapMarker will accept similar street names as a match. This requires an exact match on all elements of the street name. Also, blank input values for these elements will not match non-blank values in the candidate records. Street name exact match also requires an exact match on street type. That is, 147 Rd. must be matched exactly; 147 Ave does not match. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 214

215 MapMarker User Interface Reference City Name ZIP Code When the City Name box is checked, MapMarker requires a city name match. When this box in unchecked, the city name does not have to match. When ZIP Code is checked, ZIP Code must be exactly matched to get a geocoding match. When ZIP Code is unchecked, surrounding ZIP Codes are considered for matching purposes and records with missing ZIP Codes are also considered. CASS related Options Produce a CASS Report Use DPV Use LACSLink Use SuiteLink Return Short Address Return Short City Name If you wish to qualify your table for CASS, you must print a report USPS Form If you choose to Produce a CASS Report, the Use DPV, Use LACSLink, and Use SuiteLink check boxes are automatically checked. DPV validation is required for CASS reports. See DPV. Check this box to specify DPV geocoding. The DPV files must be installed and unlocked in order to access this feature. If you choose to Produce a CASS Report, the Use DPV mode check box is automatically checked. This is because DPV validation is required for CASS reports. Check this box to specify LACS Link processing to return addresses that have been converted because of E911 or USPS changes. The LACS Link files must be installed and unlocked in order to access this feature. See LACS Link. If you choose to Produce a CASS Report, the Use LACSlINK check box is automatically checked. Check this box to return Suite Link addresses. See Suite Link. If you choose to Produce a CASS Report, the Use SuiteLink check box is automatically checked. Check this box to return CASS abbreviated addresses. See Returning Abbreviated Addresses Check this box to return CASS short city names. Returning Abbreviated City Names. Search Level Finance Area City Searches the entire Finance Area for possible streets. A Finance Area may include more than one city of ZIP Code. If you are using CASS mode, the Finance Area constraint is enabled by default. Constrains the search to the specified city. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 215

216 MapMarker User Interface Reference Expanded search Distance in miles Limit to current state Searches for an address within a given radius (miles) of the input address. If Expanded search is selected, you can specify the distance (up to 99 miles) from the input address that MapMarker will search. If Expanded search is selected, you can limit the expanded search to the same state of the input address, regardless of the mile radius. Additional Settings Use Wide Search Accept S5 or Better Street Address Matches Accept S5 Street Address Matches Only Clear Output Columns If No Match Prefer User Dictionary Matches Prefer Matching ZIP Over Matching City Use wide search to consider all streets that begin with the first letter of the input street name, and therefore can identify many more potential candidates. Wide search is most often used in combination with Relaxed mode as part of a multiple-pass geocoding strategy. See Using Wide Search with Multiple Pass Strategy on page 74. Check this box if you only want street address matches of S5 or higher accuracy. Check this box if you want S5 street address matches only. If this box is checked, MapMarker removes existing output values for a record that it cannot match. If you want to preserve this data, such as longitude/latitude coordinates obtained from another source, clear the check box before geocoding the table. Check this box to select User Dictionary candidates over Address Dictionary candidates, regardless of match scores. When multiple potential close matches are identified, MapMarker selects a City candidate over a ZIP Code candidate by default. However, you can check Prefer Matching ZIP over Matching City to generate close matches based on ZIP Code rather than based on city. Buttons Geocode Cancel Begins the geocoding operation. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 216

217 MapMarker User Interface Reference Apply Help Applies the settings that you specified. Displays help on this dialog. Modify Table Structure dialog The Modify Table Structure dialog allows you to change the structure of your geocoding table by adding, removing or changing information about the table s columns. This is useful for creating columns on the fly when you want MapMarker to return additional data from the Address Dictionary for which you had not provided a column. This eliminates the timeconsuming step of going outside of MapMarker to make these changes. Columns Column Name Type Add Column Remove Column Column Information Name Shows the existing columns for the table. Indicates the type of column with the number of characters listed in parentheses. Adds a new column to the table at the bottom of the list with the default name Field1, Field2 etc. Removes an existing column from the table. Area where you can rename the column and change its type and width. The name of the column. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 217

218 MapMarker User Interface Reference Type Width OK Cancel Help The type of data the column contains. The character width of the column. Click to save your new column settings and close the dialog. The settings are saved in the table s metadata until you clear them. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Displays help on this dialog. Multiple Match dialog The Multiple Match dialog allows you to instruct MapMarker on how to handle multiple candidate matches with the same candidate score for a record while geocoding. Do Not Match Accept First Pick Street Address over ZIP + 4 Click this option to not allow a match to be made for the record if multiple matches occur. Click this option to accept the first candidate for the match. Click this option to accept the candidate with the most accurate street level match. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 218

219 MapMarker User Interface Reference Pick ZIP + 4 over Street Address Geocode Cancel Apply Help Click this option to accept the candidate with the most accurate ZIP + 4 level match. Begins the geocoding operation. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Applies the settings that you specified. Displays help on this dialog. Offset Preferences dialog Offset Preferences allow you to specify the distance the geocoded point spots from the corner and center line of the road. For more information on using offsets. see Offset System Preferences. Field Offset from Road Offset from Corner Description Specify that the interpolated point is offset from the street using the measurement set in the Units drop-down list. Specify that the interpolated point is offset from the street corner using the measurement set in the Units drop-down list. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 219

220 MapMarker User Interface Reference Field Description Units Use Center Line Offset Units OK Cancel Apply Help Specify the units used for the street (road) or street corner offset. When changing the units, be sure to also specify the appropriate offset distance values, because changing the units does not automatically recalculate the offset values. Specify that the point is offset from the associated street segment (rather than placed at the original point). Where possible, the coordinates are offset perpendicularly from the segment. Center Line Offset is available only if you are using a point-based Address Dictionary. A street segment dictionary must also be available. Specify the units used for the center line offset. When changing the units, be sure to also specify the appropriate offset distance values, because changing the units does not automatically recalculate the offset values. Closes the dialog and saves the changes that you have made. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Applies the settings that you specified. Provides help on the dialog. Open Project dialog Use the Open Project dialog to open a MapMarker project. A project will preserve MapMarker preferences and table settings so that they can be easily restored when you open the project. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 220

221 MapMarker User Interface Reference Look in: File name: Files of type: Open Cancel Help Lists the available folders and files. To see how the current folder fits in the hierarchy on your computer, click the down arrow. To see what is inside a folder, click it. The box below shows the folders and files in the selected location. You can also double-click a folder or file in that box to open it. Has a space for you to type the name of the file. If you select a project, the project name is populated in this box MapMarker projects have a PROJ file extension, Opens the selected project. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Displays help on this dialog. Open Table dialog Use the Open dialog to open a street file for creating a User Dictionary. Use the Open Table dialog to open a MapInfo table to geocode. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 221

222 MapMarker User Interface Reference Look in: File name: Files of type: Open Cancel Help Lists the available folders and files. To see how the current folder fits in the hierarchy on your computer, click the down arrow. To see what is inside a folder, click it. The box below shows the folders and files in the selected location. You can also double-click a folder or file in that box to open it. Has a space for you to type the name of the file. You can use * as a wildcard. For example, you can type *.* to see a list of all files. You can also type the full path of a file. For example, you can type c:\mymaps\states.tab. This is useful for narrowing the list of files displayed to only those files you are interested in. The tables displayed are tables in MapInfo format (TAB) or any other supported file format. See Supported File Formats. Select the file format of the file you want to open. Opens the file with the name, file type, and location you specified. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Displays help on this dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 222

223 MapMarker User Interface Reference Quick Find dialog The Quick Find dialog appears when you click Quick Find on the Search menu. Use this dialog to search for a single address match or to browse the Address Dictionary for a listing of street names or firms for a ZIP Code. Quick Find does not geocode the address. You can also right-click on a candidate to display the context menu. From that menu, you can copy selected information to the clipboard. See Copying Information and Displaying Status Codes for Quick Find Candidates. Input Address Firm Fields for holding parts of the address including Firm, Address, City, State, ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 fields. The name of the business residing at the address. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 223

224 MapMarker User Interface Reference Address/Single Line Address Address2 City State ZIP Code Plus 4 Quick Find Settings Clear Fields Geocoding Result Match Candidate List The primary street address. This can also include the, one-line single line address with address components in the order: <street address> <city> <state> <ZIP> <country>. Not all address components are required. You can use delimiters (comma, semicolon, colon, or tab) between each component of the single line address. If no delimiters are present, MapMarker recognizes spaces as separators, but non-delimited addresses may take longer to geocode. The Browse selection in the Quick Find dialog does not support the single line address format. That is, the ZIP Code (and City/State information if provided) must be entered in separate input fields, not in single line format. The secondary street address (for example, an apartment or post office box number). The full city name. The abbreviated state code (for example, NY for New York). The five-digit ZIP Code. The four digit extension to the ZIP Code. Changes the criteria used in producing your Quick Find search results. Clears the address fields and items in the candidates list. After MapMarker searches for a match, it returns a message here describing the type of match. The list box contains at least one candidate based on the provided input information and search criteria. If no candidates are identified, the message no suggestions available appears. A green check mark in the Num column indicates a close match. See Match Candidate List on page 131 for a description of the columns in the Quick Find dialog. The same columns appear for interactive geocoded tables. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 224

225 MapMarker User Interface Reference Ranges Map Search Browse Close Help Displays a detailed list of address ranges for the highlighted street. The ZIP + 4 is displayed for each street range. By default, MapMarker displays the range that most closely matches the input address. This button is active only when you look for a match via Search. You cannot display address ranges from a Quick Find Browse. Displays a map showing all match candidates for the input address. You must previously set the location of your street data in Options > System Preferences > Maps tab. This button is active only when you look for a match via Search. You cannot map any results of a Quick Find Browse. Allows you to search the Address Dictionary after you have entered the input address. Allows you to see a listing of streets or firms in the Address Dictionary. Requires that you enter the ZIP Code and either the partial or full street name or firm. ZIP Code (and City/State information if provided) must be entered in separate input fields, not in single line format. Stops the search for a match and closes the dialog. Displays help on this dialog. Quick Find Settings dialog MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 225

226 MapMarker User Interface Reference Use the Quick Find Settings dialog to change the criteria used in producing your Quick Find search results. Match Modes Standard Mode Tight Mode Relaxed Mode CASS Custom Selections (Exact Match On) House Number You can select one of the match modes to control the geocoding precision and number of returned candidates. You can also select Custom (Exact Match On) to achieve more precise control over your geocoding results. Check this box to implement Standard Mode matching. This typically provides the best balance among hit rate, performance, and minimizing extraneous matches. See Match Modes. Check this box to implement Tight Mode. This restrictive mode generates the most precise matching. In general, this returns fewer non-close matches than are returned in Standard mode. See Match Modes. Check this box to implement Relaxed Mode. This provides less strict matching rules. In general, this increases your chances of getting a close match. This is the only mode that does not respect the street parity when making an address match. See Match Modes. Check this box to use CASS mode in finding addresses. Note: When this check box is selected, several other options on this dialog are disabled and their values are overwritten by CASS rules. Use Exact Match selections to fine-tune your control over geocoding matching preferences. You can specify precise matching criteria based on house number, street name, city name, and ZIP Code. If all specified criteria are not met, then the geocoded candidate is not considered a close match. When the House Number box is checked, candidate house numbers must be exactly matched to return a close match. When the House Number box is unchecked, MapMarker can make a close match even if the house number match is not exact. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 226

227 MapMarker User Interface Reference Street Name City Name ZIP Code Search Level Distance in miles Limit to current state Finance Area City Use Wide Search When the Street Name box is checked, candidate street names must be exactly matched to get a geocoding match. When the street name box is unchecked, MapMarker will accept similar street names as a match. This requires an exact match on all elements of the street name. Also, blank input values for these elements will not match non-blank values in the candidate records. When the City Name box is checked, MapMarker requires a city name match. When this box in unchecked, the city name does not have to match. When ZIP Code is checked, ZIP Code must be exactly matched to get a geocoding match. When ZIP Code is unchecked, surrounding ZIP Codes are considered for matching purposes and records with missing ZIP Codes are also considered. Select City, Finance Area, or Expanded from the drop down list. Finance Area is the default for CASS Mode. City is the default for all other modes. If Expanded Search is selected, Distance in miles specifies how many miles from the input address to expand the search. You can specify up to 99 (miles). If Expanded Search is selected, Limit to current state limits the expanded search to the same state of the input address, regardless of the mile radius. Select this Search Level to perform street level geocoding within the Finance Area in which the input street is located. Select this Search Level to perform street level geocoding within the city that the input street is located. Use wide search to consider all streets that begin with the first letter of the input street name, and therefore can identify many more potential candidates. Wide search is most often used in combination with Relaxed mode as part of a multiple-pass geocoding strategy. See Using Wide Search with Multiple Pass Strategy on page 74. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 227

228 MapMarker User Interface Reference Prefer Matching ZIP over Matching City Fallback Fallback to ZIP Centroid Fallback to Geographic Centroid Candidates to Return All Candidates Close Candidates Only OK Cancel Help Check this box to prefer an internal close candidate on postal code over a match on city. If MapMarker cannot match a record to the level or precision that you have requested (such as street level), it can fall back to use less precise matching criteria. You can select one or both of the fallback options. Click this option to allow fallback to ZIP Code Centroids. If a close match was not found using the Require Exact Match criteria, you can still geocode based on ZIP Code centroids. Click this option to allow fallback to geographic centroids. If a close match was not found using the Require Exact Match criteria, you still can geocode based on state, county, or city centroids. These are not very specific geocoding options, but may be suitable for certain applications. You can specify the number of candidates you want Quick Find to return. Click this option to return all candidates matching the search criteria you specify. Click this option to return only the candidates that closely match the search criteria you specify. Saves your Quick Find settings and return to the Quick Find dialog. Closes the Quick Find Settings dialog without saving your changes. Displays help on this dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 228

229 MapMarker User Interface Reference Related Table dialog This dialog only appears if you are geocoding a remote table and want to write the results to a related table. It tells MapMarker whether you want to optimize the geocoding operation for inserting new records or for updating existing records. Note: This feature is not available for single remote table geocoding. Optimize for Insertion Optimize for Update Geocode Cancel Apply Help Choose this option if your results table is new or contains few records. Choose this option if your results table contains many records are likely to be updated. Begins the geocoding operation. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Applies the settings that you specified. Displays help on this dialog. Save As dialog The basic "Save As" dialog is used in several contexts. Save Batch File Save Project File Export to Shapefile MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 229

230 MapMarker User Interface Reference Save Table Summary As dialog Save Batch File The Save As dialog appears when you select Create Batch File from the Table menu. Use it to navigate to a folder in which to save your batch file. Save Project File The Save As dialog appears when you select File > Projects > Create/Save Project. Use it to name a project with a PROJ file extension. See Creating and Saving a Project. Export to Shapefile The Save As dialog appears after you open a TAB, CSV, delimited text (TXT), or DBF file and select Table > Export to ESRI Shapefile. Use it to name a SHP file when you are exporting to Shapefile format. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 230

231 MapMarker User Interface Reference Save Table Summary As dialog The Save Table Summary As dialog appears when you click OK on the Table Georesult Summary dialog. This allows you to specify the name and location of the logfile. Select Attribute Tables dialog MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 231

232 MapMarker User Interface Reference The Select Attribute Tables dialog allows you to choose the attribute tables MapMarker accesses during the attribution process. Available Tables Selected Tables Add Remove Remove All Drives OK Cancel Help Displays the directory structure of the chosen drive that contains the table you want MapMarker to use for tagging. Displays the table(s) you have chosen for the attribution process. Adds the highlighted table in the Available Tables list to the Selected Tables list. Removes the highlighted table(s) from the Selected Tables list. Removes all items from the Selected Tables list. Lists the drives on the system. The chosen drive displays the directory structure in the Available Tables list. Invokes the settings and closes the dialog. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Displays help on this dialog. Select Data Source When using a remote table as a geocoding source, you can select either a file data source or a machine-specific data source. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 232

233 MapMarker User Interface Reference File Data Source Machine Data Source Data source can potentially be shared over network by authorized users. You can use any file data source that refers to an ODBC driver that is installed on your system. Data source is specific to a machine. User data sources are specific to a user on this machine. System data sources can be used by all users on this machine. Select input columns from your table dialog Use this dialog to choose the fields from your table that contain the address information to be matched against the Address Dictionary during the geocoding operation. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 233

234 MapMarker User Interface Reference Table Firm Address Address2 City State ZIP Code ZIP + 4 Urb Modify/Add Columns Identifies the name of the table and lists all columns in the table that can be selected. Highlight an address column name and drag it to the appropriate address component box. If the table has been previously geocoded, MapMarker remembers the fields from the table s metadata. If this is the first time you have geocoded this table, MapMarker attempts to guess at the correct fields by examining their field names. To view the complete name of a field that extends beyond the box provided, hold the cursor over the field name and MapMarker displays a popup box with the full name of the field. Specify the field that contains the name of the organization associated with the record, if any. Select the column from your table that contains the primary address data. Single line address input is recognized in the ADDRESS column. single line addresses appear on a single line. You can use delimiters (comma, semicolon, colon, or tab) between each component of the single line address. If no delimiters are present in the address, MapMarker recognizes spaces as separators, but non-delimited addresses may take longer to geocode. Select the secondary address column. The secondary address is usually used for apartment numbers or post office box numbers. This optional information is appended to the end of the street to form the complete address to be parsed. Select the column containing the town or city name. Select the column containing the two-letter state name. Select the column containing the ZIP Code or ZIP + 4 if contained in one column. Select the column containing additional ZIP + 4 information if it is contained in a separate column from ZIP Code; this information is optional. This field holds the urbanization code, an address component for addresses in Puerto Rico. If you are trying to qualify your table for CASS, you must provide this field, even if you do not have Puerto Rican addresses. Leads to the Modify Table Structure dialog where you can add, remove or change information about the columns in the open table. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 234

235 MapMarker User Interface Reference County Use Address2 as Intersection Cross Street Next Cancel Help Choose the column containing the county name. Specify this column only if you want to geocode to the county centroid. Enables you to specify the Address2 column as the intersection cross street to Address1. Moves to the Select Output Columns dialog. Cancels the settings and closes the dialog. Displays help on this dialog. Select output columns from your table dialog MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 235

236 MapMarker User Interface Reference In this dialog, you specify the columns to contain the results of the geocoding operation, such as: result code, longitude, latitude, and CASS required information. This dialog appears when you click Next in the Select Input Columns dialog after selecting your input address column choices. Table Status Column Coordinate Columns Create points in MapInfo Table Output Address Columns Identifies the name of the table and lists all columns in the table that can be selected. Highlight an address column name and drag to the appropriate address component box. If the table has been previously geocoded, MapMarker remembers the fields from the table s metadata. If this is the first time you have geocoded this table, MapMarker attempts to guess at the correct fields by examining their field names. To view the complete name of a field that extends beyond the box provided, hold the cursor over the field name and MapMarker displays a popup box with the full name of the field. Select the columns where MapMarker stores the result code for each candidate. The result code indicates how the record was matched and whether the match is exact. Use the code to diagnose MapMarker performance, to identify false positives, and analyze ungeocoded records. The result code column is optional, but highly recommended. You can also map output columns for the Match code and Location code. The Match code indicates the portions of the address that matched or did not match. The Location code indicates the accuracy of the assigned geocode. For local tables, choose the columns where longitude (x coordinate) and latitude (y coordinate) information is written when a record is geocoded. These columns are optional when Create Points is selected. For local tables check this box if you want MapMarker to automatically create points for your MapInfo table. Creating points is optional if you have specified coordinate columns. For SpatialWare tables, MapMarker automatically creates points for the table. The option box is then checked and grayed out. Specify the columns for these components if you want MapMarker to return the address information from the Address Dictionary. To avoid overwriting your data, be sure to identify columns other than the address columns you chose in the Select Input Columns dialog. These columns are optional unless you are geocoding your table to meet CASS. The Census and Carrier Route fields are optional in all situations. See Specify Output Address Columns for more information. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 236

237 MapMarker User Interface Reference Modify/Add Columns button Show/Hide DPV and LACSLink Columns button Back Finish Cancel Help Leads to the Modify Table Structure dialog where you can add, remove, or change information about the columns in the open table. When you click Show DPV and LACSLink Columns, the view switches to the DPV and LACS Link output columns that are required for generating a CASS report. See DPV Output Columns and LACS Link Output Columns for detailed information. You can then click Hide DPV and LACSLink Columns to go back and view the first set of address output columns. Returns to the Select Input Columns dialog. Completes the columns selection process and closes the dialog. Cancels the settings and closes the dialog. Displays help on this dialog. Select Project Files dialog This dialog appears when you create a batch file to run a project that was created using a delimited file or fixed-width TXT file. After you complete this dialog, you will see the Save As dialog. Field Available Projects Selected Projects Add Description Displays the available projects that you can add to a project-based batch file. Displays the project(s) you have chosen for the batch file. Adds the highlighted table in the Available Projects list to the Selected Projects list. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 237

238 MapMarker User Interface Reference Field Remove Remove All Drives OK Cancel Help Removes the highlighted Project(s) from the Selected Projects list. Removes all items from the Selected Projects list. Use the drop-down arrow to select from the available drives on the system. Invokes the settings and closes the dialog. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Provides help on this dialog. Description Select Table dialog This dialog appears after selecting a data source when opening an ODBC table. Use this dialog to select the table you wish to open within the data source you specified. Owner Filter list of tables OK Cancel Help Specify the owner of the table. Click to set filters on the types of tables you want to select from. List of all tables in the database that are owned by you or accessible to you, constrained by the filters you set. Choose which table you want to geocode. Carries out the operation and closes the dialog. Cancels the settings and closes the dialog. Displays help on this dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 238

239 MapMarker User Interface Reference Select Table Type dialog This dialog prompts you to choose between opening a MapInfo TAB or other supported file format or an ODBC table. This dialog appears if you have set startup preferences to open both local and remote (ODBC) tables when you start MapMarker. See Startup Preferences dialog Open MapInfo table, or.dbf file Open ODBC table OK Cancel Help Click this option if you want to open a MapInfo TAB, DBF, or other supported file format. This includes CSV or other delimited files. See Supported File Formats. Click this option if you want to open an ODBC table. Carries out the operation and closes the dialog. Cancels the settings and closes the dialog. Displays help on this dialog. Startup Preferences dialog MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 239

240 MapMarker User Interface Reference The Startup tab identifies the settings MapMarker uses when you start the application. You can select any or all check boxes. If you select either Show MapInfo/dBASE files or Show for ODBC tables, the Open dialog will be displayed automatically when you start MapMarker. If you check both boxes, MapMarker prompts you with another dialog at startup to choose which type of table you want to open. File Open Startup Options Show Select Column Dialog On Open Select Attribute Files After Selecting Columns Show Geocode Dialog After Selecting Columns Show Add Georesult, Longitude/Latitude Columns Dialog Write modified address on geocode in interactive dialog Log file Viewer OK Cancel Check either or both boxes in this group: Show for MapInfo TAB, DBF, or delimited text files Show for ODBC Tables If you check both items, MapMarker prompts you to choose which table type you want to open when you start MapMarker. The Select Input Columns dialog automatically appears when you open a table. This is the default setting. The Select Attribute Tables dialog appears after you choose input and output columns for the open table. The default setting is not to display this dialog. The Geocode dialog appears automatically once you have opened your table and identified the address columns for geocoding. This is the default setting. When this check box is selected, the Add Columns dialog appears upon opening a table without a latitude, longitude, or georesult column. This check box is selected by default. When this check box is selected, any address you modify during an interactive geocoding run is updated in your table by default. Identify a viewer for MapMarker to display a message log file at the conclusion of the geocoding pass. Provide the viewer name in the box or click Browse to find its location. Windows Notepad is the default viewer. Closes the dialog and saves the changes that you have made. Closes the dialog and cancels the changes that you have made. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 240

241 MapMarker User Interface Reference Apply Help Applies the settings that you specified. Displays help on this dialog. Table Georesult Summary dialog The table Georesult Summary Dialog appears when you click Table > Table Summary. The Table Summary option is available after you have opened a table. If a table has a georesult column, this dialog generates a report providing statistics about the number and type of geocodes. Select the georesult column OK Cancel Help This list contains an alphabetical list of the column headings in your table. Choose a column that contains georesult codes and click OK. A report is generated with statistics based off the georesult codes in the specified column. Invokes the settings and closes the dialog. The settings are saved in the table s metadata until you clear them. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Displays help on this dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 241

242 MapMarker User Interface Reference Text File Wizard (Step 1 of 3) This is the first dialog box in the Text File Wizard. Text File Type Delimiter Type First Line Used for Column Titles Next Cancel Help Delimited is the only supported text file type. If MapMarker can determine the delimiter type (comma, semicolon, tab, slash, or other), the delimiter will be preselected. Otherwise, you can specify the delimiter type (comma, semicolon, tab, slash, or other). Specifies that the first line of the input file is used for column titles rather than data. Go to the next dialog in the Text File Wizard. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Displays help on this dialog. Text File Wizard (Step 2 of 3) Opening a Table or Text File MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 242

243 MapMarker User Interface Reference Text File Wizard (Step 2 of 3) This is the second dialog box in the Text File Wizard. Click a field name to see all the relevant the Information for that field. You can view this information and may be able to change some fields. Fields Name Width List Box Click a field name to see all the relevant the Information for that field. You can use the following fields to view and possibly change any of this information. Displays the name of the selected field. Displays the width of the selected field. This cannot be changed in this dialog. The list box area at the bottom of the dialog will display up to the first 20 records of the opened file. Back Returns to Text File Wizard (Step 1 of 3). Next Cancel Help Go to the next dialog in the Text File Wizard. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Displays help on this dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 243

244 MapMarker User Interface Reference Text File Wizard (Step 3 of 3) This is the final step of the Text File Wizard. Input Path Output Path This shows the data input path. This is for display only and cannot be changes at this point. Specify the full path of the output file. If the file already exists, data will be overwritten. Back Returns to Text File Wizard (Step 2 of 3). OK Cancel Help Completes the Text File Wizard. Cancels the operation and closes the dialog. Displays help on this dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 244

245 C C Creating a Map Catalog Manually This appendix includes instructions for creating a MapInfo Map Catalog manually and making a remote table mappable, two procedures that are necessary for geocoding remote tables. This information is designed for users who do not have access to MapInfo Professional. If you have MapInfo Professional, see the MapInfo Professional User s Guide for instructions on carrying out these procedures automatically. The MapInfo Professional online help system includes topics on Creating a MapInfo_MapCatalog and Making a Remote Table Mappable. For more complete details on remote table geocoding see Geocoding Remote Tables in Chapter 7 on page 157. In this appendix: Manually Creating a MapInfo Map Catalog 246 Adding Rows to the MapInfo_MapCatalog 247

246 Creating a Map Catalog Manually Manually Creating a MapInfo Map Catalog If you are not a MapInfo Professional or EasyLoader user, you or your database administrator will need to create the Map Catalog manually, as described below. You only have to create the Map Catalog once per server/database. 1. Create the user MAPINFO in the specific database where the mappable tables are located. 2. Create the table MAPINFO_MAPCATALOG in the database. The Create Table statement needs to be equivalent to the following SQL Create Table statement: Create Table MAPINFO_MAPCATALOG ( SPATIALTYPE Float, TABLENAME Char(32), OWNERNAME Char(32), SPATIALCOLUMN Char(32), DB_X_LL Float, DB_Y_LL Float, DB_X_UR Float, DB_Y_UR Float, VIEW_X_LL Float, VIEW_Y_LL Float, VIEW_X_UR Float, VIEW_Y_UR Float, COORDINATESYSTEM Char(254), SYMBOL Char(254), XCOLUMNNAME Char(32), YCOLUMNNAME Char(32), RENDITIONTYPE INTEGER, RENDITIONCOLUMN CHAR(32), RENDITIONTABLE CHAR(32) NUMBER_ROWS INTEGER ) It is important that the structure of the table looks exactly like this statement. The only substitution that can be made is for databases that support varchar or text data types; these data types can be substituted for the Char data type. 3. Create a unique index on the TABLENAME and the OWNERNAME, so only one table for each owner can be made mappable. create unique index mapcat_i1 on mapinfo.mapinfo_catalog (OwnerName,TableName) 4. Grant Select, Update, Insert, and Delete privileges on the MAPINFO_MAPCATALOG. This allows users to make tables mappable. The delete privilege should be reserved for database administrators. grant select, insert, update, delete on mapinfo.mapinfo_mapcatalog to public MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 246

247 Creating a Map Catalog Manually Adding Rows to the MapInfo_MapCatalog For each spatial table that you want to access from your application, you need to add a row to the MAPINFO_MAPCATALOG table. If you do not use MapInfo Professional to manage the MapInfo_MapCatalog, you will have to add rows to the MAPINFO_MAPCATALOG table manually. The following describes the syntax and meaning of each column in the Map Catalog Table. Map Catalog Table Column Name Values to Assign Examples SPATIALTYPE MapInfo Spatial Object Format See Spatial Index Types for SPATIALTYPE Spatial Object Type x.0: Points only x.1: Lines only x.2: Regions only x.3: All types supported This column describes the Spatial Object Format of how the data is stored and indexed and the Spatial Object type(s) supported and not supported in the column. The digits to the left of the decimal point are the Spatial Object Format. The digits to the right represent the type of Spatial Object Type that can be stored in the column 29.0 = SQL Server TABLENAME The name of the table. STATES OWNERNAME The owner name of the table. BOB SPATIALCOLUMN The name of the column, if any, containing spatial features: SW_GEOMETRY (mappable using SpatialWare Type/IDS/UDO) NO_COLUMN (mappable using X Y) MI_SQL_MICODE (mappable using MI Code) Or the name of the IDS/UDO, or Oracle column that is ST_SPATIAL datatype. Name of the Oracle SDO_GEOMETRY column. SW_GEOMETRY MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 247

248 Creating a Map Catalog Manually Map Catalog Table (Continued) Column Name Values to Assign Examples DB_X_LL The X coordinate of the lower left corner of the layer s bounding rectangle, in units that are indicated by the COORDINATESYSTEM (see below). 360 DB_Y_LL The lower left bounding Y value. 90 DB_X_UR The upper right bounding X value. 360 DB_Y_UR The upper right bounding Y value. 90 VIEW_X_LL VIEW_Y_LL VIEW_X_UR VIEW_Y_UR COORDINATESY STEM SYMBOL XCOLUMNNAME The X coordinate of the lower left corner of the default view. The default view only applies if this is the first table to be opened. The lower left bounding Y value of the default view. The upper right bounding X value of the default view. The upper right bounding Y value of the default view. A string representing a MapInfo CoordSys clause (but without the keyword CoordSys at the very start), which specifies a map projection, coordinate units, etc. For simple Lon/Lat maps, specify Earth Projection 1, 0. A MapInfo Symbol clause (if the layer contains only points); or a Symbol clause followed by a Pen clause (indicating styles for linear features) followed by another Pen clause (indicating styles for the borders of regions) followed by a Brush clause. For the X/Y mappable tables, specify the name of the column containing X- coordinates. If there is no such column (i.e., if this table uses a single spatial column instead of a pair of X-Y columns) then specify NO_COLUMN or leave empty Earth Projection 1, 0 Symbol(35,0,12) Pen(1,2,0) Pen(1,2,0) Brush(2,255,255) NO_COLUMN MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 248

249 Creating a Map Catalog Manually Map Catalog Table (Continued) Column Name Values to Assign Examples YCOLUMNNAME RENDITIONTYPE RENDITIONCOLU MN RENDITIONTABL E For the X/Y mappable tables, specify the name of the column containing Y coordinates, or specify NO_COLUMN This indicates how the object style information is applied. 0 Indicates that all the objects in the table will have the style specified in the symbol field of the MapCatalog applied to them. No per-record styles are in effect. Objects will be read/updated using the default style for the table. 1 Indicates that the table uses per-record styles. The table has a separate column that contains a MapBasic string representation of the style information for each object in the table (the same format that is currently used in the MapCatalog SYMBOL column). The style column in the table is recorded in RENDITIONCOLUMN. If RENDITIONTYPE is 1, this field stores the name of the column in the spatial table that contains style information. This column is automatically added to any query against the table and is maintained (updated) as the object is updated. Users should NOT specify this column in their queries as problems can occur with intersect or update statements. Queries which include this column in the select clause (excluding the wildcard character * ) may access the values through the Dataset object. Rows with a NULL value in their style column will have the style from the SYMBOL field of the MapCatalog applied to the object. Creates a MapInfo.Column.DataType with MIDBType.Style Currently not used, but reserved for future use. NO_COLUMN 0 or 1 MI_SYMBOLOGY NULL NUMBER_ROWS Currently used by MapInfo Professional. NULL MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 249

250 Creating a Map Catalog Manually Spatial Index Types for SPATIALTYPE This table lists the supported Spatial Index types for SPATIALTYPE.. Spatial Index Types Spatial Index Type Type Number MapInfo MICODE schema (any database) Point layer in X/Y columns indexed with micode (a serialized quadtree key) 1 XY schema (any database) Point layer in X/Y columns 4 Oracle Spatial Geometry 13.x SpatialWare for Microsoft SQL Server 14.x Oracle Spatial Annotation Text 16.x SQL Server Spatial (for geometry) 17.x SQL Server Spatial (for geography) 18.x PostGIS for PostgreSQL 19.x SQL Server Spatial with M and Z values (for geometry) 20.x SQL Server Spatial with M and Z values (for geography) 21.x Per-Record Styles Per-record style allows geometry in a single table to have its own style. For example, a single 'public institution' table in Oracle Spatial can have schools, town halls, libraries, and police departments and each point type would be represented with its own symbol (i.e., a school symbol for all the schools). Similarly, a single road table in SpatialWare SQL Server may have different road types such that streets are shown as a single pixel black line, secondary roads as a double pixel red line and interstates as parallel red lines. To use per-record styles, your table must be represented with an entry in the MapInfo Map Catalog with appropriate settings for RENDITIONTYPE, RENDITIONCOLUMN, and RENDITIONTABLE. Note: If these columns are not present, the table s default style will be applied to all objects. Symbol, Pen, Brush Clause Syntax If you are manually creating a MAPINFO_MAPCATALOG table to provide support for a remote spatial database, you will need to specify a symbol style, and possibly line and fill styles as well. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 250

251 Creating a Map Catalog Manually Specifying Point Styles Use a Symbol clause to specify point styles. There are three types of Symbol clauses: one for specifying MapInfo 3.0-style symbols; one for specifying TrueType font symbols; and one for specifying bitmap symbols. Point Styles Symbol Syntax Example Symbol(shape, color, size) or Symbol(shape,color,size,font,fontstyle,r otation) or Symbol(bitmapname,color,size,customs tyle) Symbol(35,0,12) Symbol(64,255,12,"MapInfo Weather",17,0) Symbol("sign.bmp", 255, 18, 0) Specifying Line Styles Use a Pen clause to specify line styles. In a MAPINFO_MAPCATALOG table, you may need to specify two pen clauses: one to specify the appearance of linear features, and another to specify the appearance of region borders. Line Styles Pen Syntax Example Pen(thickness, pattern, color) Pen(1, 2, 0) Specifying Fill Styles Use a Brush clause to specify the style for closed features (regions). Fill Styles Brush Syntax Example Brush(pattern,color,backgroundcolor) Brush(2, 255, 65535) MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 251

252 D D MapMarker Utility Programs This appendix describes utility programs that are installed with MapMarker: Find Address and the User Dictionary creation tool. Note that Find Address is an MBX program that must run from MapInfo Professional. In this appendix: FindAddress 253 User Dictionary Utility 254

253 MapMarker Utility Programs FindAddress FindAddress is a MapBasic application that allows you to find any address contained in the MapMarker Address Dictionary or from a customized user dictionary and display the location in MapInfo Professional. You can find street intersections as well. FindAddress is included on the MapMarker DVD-ROM and installs in the MapMarker installation directory. FindAddress uses the MapMarker geocoding engine and the Address Dictionary to match the U.S. address or street intersection you want to find and spot on the map. FindAddress is run from within MapInfo Professional 32-bit edition. It is installed on the Tools menu when you invoke the MapBasic application. Running FindAddress To run FindAddress: 1. From MapInfo Professional (32-bit only), select Run MapBasic Program. The Run MapBasic Program dialog is displayed. 2. Select findad32.mbx from the MapMarker directory. Click OK. FindAddress is added to the Tools menu. 3. With an active Map window displaying the general area of the address you wish to find, select Tools > FindAddress > Locate Address. The Find Address dialog is displayed. 4. Type the address you want to find. You must enter the street name and either the city/state or the ZIP Code. Click FindAddress. MapInfo Professional locates the address and marks the location with a symbol. To match to ZIP Code centroids, enter at least a 5 or 9 digit ZIP Code and click Map Centroid. To find a street intersection, in the Street Address text box enter the first street name followed by the ampersand (&) or the word and followed by the second street name. For example: East 37th Street & Avenue P. Click FindAddress. MapInfo Professional locates the intersection. 5. If multiple address or intersection candidates are found, FindAddress appears them in the Candidate Address dialog. Highlight the appropriate address or intersection. The ranges of that address are displayed in the Ranges dialog. To spot the location on the map, click Map Candidate. 6. To find the ZIP Code centroid for your address, type in the ZIP Code and click Map Centroid. MapInfo Professional spots a symbol at the ZIP Code centroid. 7. Close the FindAddress dialog by clicking Close Window. The Map window appears and the symbol for the located address is visible. 8. To change the default symbol, the zoom level for the Map window, or to change address match settings, select Tools > FindAddress > Options. Note that changing the zoom level in the Options dialog only takes effect after you have located another address in the FindAddress dialog. For the zoom level units, FindAddress uses the settings you set in Map > Map Options. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 253

254 MapMarker Utility Programs Address Dictionary FindAddress needs to know the location of the MapMarker Address Dictionary to find your addresses. This information is contained in two places in the Windows Registry: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\MAPINFO\MAPMARKER\USA\<version number>\ SYSTEM\DatabasePath HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\MAPINFO\MAPMARKER\USA<version number>\ SYSTEM\DatabasePath Note: In references to the MapMarker registry keys, <version number> shows the majorrelease version of MapMarker, for example, 29.0 even if you are running one of the point releases of that version, such as, 29.1 If you move the Address Dictionary at any time, be sure to update the new path information in either of these places so that FindAddress works properly. You can find addresses or street intersections from a customized user dictionary as well as from the MapMarker Address Dictionary. User Dictionary Utility The User Dictionary utility supplied with the MapMarker Desktop and Developer editions is used to create a custom user dictionary of streets and address ranges or point addresses that you use as a source for geocoding. If you have newer or more precise data than what is available in the MapMarker Address Dictionary, creating a dictionary with this data can help you get more accurate geocoding results. For example, if you have address point data you can create a point-based User Dictionary. Candidates from a point dictionary can return an S8 result code, corresponding to the exact point with no interpolation required. A User Dictionary can be used by itself to geocode records, or can be used in combination with the supplied Address Dictionary. User Dictionary Capabilities and Requirements The capabilities of User Dictionaries and the basic requirements for creating them are as follows. All fields supported by normal street geocoding can be included in User Dictionaries. Points Of Interest (POI) geocoding is supported in User Dictionaries. Postal or geographic centroid geocoding are not supported in User Dictionaries. User Dictionaries support address browsing using partial street names or Points of Interest. User Dictionaries do not support reverse geocoding. The results from a User Dictionary are similar to that from the MapMarker Address Dictionary. The only difference appears in the georesult code. A candidate from a User Dictionary has a U at the end of the georesult code. A candidate that comes from the MapMarker Address Dictionary has an A at the end of the georesult code. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 254

255 MapMarker Utility Programs For example: S5HPNTSCZA is a result code that comes from an Address Dictionary, while S5HPNTSCZU comes from a User Dictionary. See Chapter 5 Result Codesfor a complete description of result codes. Source Data Requirements The source data for User Dictionaries includes street data but can also include place names and intersections. To create a User Dictionary, your source data must conform to the following requirements: Source records must include required fields, and these fields are mapped during the User Dictionary creation process. If a value of a required field is empty for a particular record, then that record will not be imported into the User Dictionary. The MapInfo table must contain specific fields, which MapMarker then uses to convert the table into the dictionary format. These input fields are described in Required Input Columns on page 255. Source records must be in a MapInfo table (TAB). The TAB file requirements will vary for different countries. Segments that make up intersections must have one or more endpoints in the intersection for MapMarker to recognize it as an intersection. Source records can be either point objects or segments. Each row in the table is equivalent to a street segment or point address. Required Input Columns You must specify the field names in the MapInfo table (TAB file) in order for the table to be translated into a User Dictionary. Certain fields are required and must be present in the MapInfo table. Other fields are optional, but are strongly recommended because there may be negative consequences if they are omitted. This is described in Optional (Recommended) Input Columns on page 256. If any of the required fields are missing, a missing field error code is returned. The following tables describe the required input fields for an address range dictionary and a point address dictionary, respectively. Required Input Columns for Address Range User Dictionary Required Fields Left Starting Address Number Right Starting Address Number Description Start of address range on left side of street Start of address range on right side of street Maximum Field Length MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 255

256 MapMarker Utility Programs Required Input Columns for Address Range User Dictionary (Continued) Required Fields Left Ending Address Number Right Ending Address Number Description End of address range on left side of street End of address range on right side of street Maximum Field Length Street Name Name of street 30 State Two-character state abbreviation 2 Left ZIP Code ZIP Code for left side of street 5 Right ZIP Code ZIP Code for right side of the street 5 Required Input Columns for Point-based Address User Dictionary Required Fields Description Maximum Field Length Address Number Number of the address 10 Street Name Name of street 30 State Two-character state abbreviation 2 ZIP Code ZIP Code for the address 5 Optional (Recommended) Input Columns The Left and Right Odd/Even Indicator fields are used to specify whether the sides of the street segment contain odd or even address ranges. Although these indicators are not required for creating a User Dictionary, it is important to use the Odd/Even Indicators when your data contains odd/even address numbers. When the Odd/Even Indicator is specified, but is inconsistent with address numbers, the indicator is set to Both. When the Odd/Even Indicator is not specified and both Start Address and End Address have values, the indicator is set to Both, unless the start and end address numbers are the same number. In that case, the indicator is set to Odd if the address numbers are odd, and set to Even if the address numbers are even. When the Odd/Even Indicator is not specified and both Start Address and End Address have values, the indicator is set to Both (odd and even). MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 256

257 MapMarker Utility Programs Note: If your table contains odd/even indicator information, we strongly recommend that you use the Odd/Even indicator fields. These fields ensure that your geocoded addresses are located on the correct side of the street. Omitting the fields when your data contains odd/even information may produce incorrect results. The following tables describe the optional input columns for address ranges and pointbased addresses, respectively. Optional Input Columns for Address Range User Dictionary Optional Fields Description Maximum Field Length Left ZIP + 4 Code 4-digit ZIP + 4 add-on left side of street 4 Right ZIP + 4 Code 4-digit ZIP + 4 add-on right side of street 4 Left Census Block Census Block ID for left side of street 15 Right Census Block Census Block ID for right side of street 15 Left Odd/Even indicator * Right Odd/Even indicator * Left side of the street contains only odd or even address ranges (O=odd, E=even, B=both) Right side of the street contains only odd or even address ranges (O=odd, E=even, B=both) 1 1 Place Name Place name 40 City Name * City name 28 * These fields are highly recommended. Optional Input Columns for Point-based Address User Dictionary Optional Fields Description Maximum Field Length ZIP + 4 Code 4-digit ZIP + 4 add-on 4 Census Block Census Block ID 15 Odd/Even indicator * Address contains only odd or even address ranges (O=odd, E=even, B=both) 1 Place Name Place name 40 MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 257

258 MapMarker Utility Programs Optional Input Columns for Point-based Address User Dictionary (Continued) Optional Fields Description Maximum Field Length City Name * City name 28 * These fields are highly recommended. User Dictionary File Names and Formats MapMarker has some requirements for User Dictionary files that you must be aware of before you create a User Dictionary: Each User Dictionary has a base name of eight characters or fewer. Each User Dictionary must reside in its own directory. The maximum length of a path to a User Dictionary is 1024 characters. The maximum length of the paths to multiple User dictionaries is 1024 characters. The ZIP Code range in the MapInfo table for a User Dictionary is unlimited. All rows must have the ZIP Code field populated with a 5-digit value. Because each User Dictionary resides in its own directory, User dictionaries may share the same name. However, it is generally good practice to use a unique name for each User Dictionary. Some of the output files are tied to the base name. The other output files have constant names. For example, the output files for a dictionary called ud1 are the following: postinfo.jdr postinfo.jdx lastline.jdr post2sac.mmj geo2sac.mmj sac2fn_ud.mmj ud1.jdr ud1.jdx ud1.bdx If your data includes placenames, the dictionary contains the following files: ud1.pdx ud1.pbx The dictionary also contains these log files: ud1.log ud1.err MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 258

259 MapMarker Utility Programs Using the MapMarker User Dictionary Utility To create a user dictionary: 1. Run MapMarker User Dictionary Utility from the Start menu. 2. At the Dictionary Name screen, provide a name and optionally, a description, for your User Dictionary. The folder where the dictionary will be created must be empty. 3. At the Country screen, choose USA. 4. At the User Dictionary Type screen, choose between building a user dictionary of address ranges or point-based addresses. Default is address ranges. 5. At the Input Table Information screen, provide the path and file containing your source records. See Source Data Requirements on page 255 for more information. 6. Provide the required and optional columns to include in the dictionary. See Required Input Columns on page 255 and Optional (Recommended) Input Columns on page Click Finish to create the User Dictionary. Adding the User Dictionary to the Desktop Application After creating a User Dictionary, you must add the dictionary so that it can be used by the Desktop Application. See Dictionary Preferences on page 84. Preferring User Dictionary Matches You can geocode using: one or more User Dictionaries alone Standard MapMarker Address Dictionary A combination of Address Dictionary and User Dictionaries The results from a User Dictionary are similar to that from the MapMarker Address Dictionary. The major difference is that the user dictionary provides point geocoding accuracy (S8 results). Also candidate from a User Dictionary has a U at the end of the georesult code. A candidate that comes from the MapMarker Address Dictionary has an A at the end of the georesult code. In the Desktop Application, use the Match Settings tab of the Geocode dialog to specify whether you prefer User Dictionary matches (or Address Dictionary matches.) If you check Prefer User Dictionary Matches, the User Dictionary will be used in preference to the Address Dictionary. Otherwise, the Address Dictionary is preferred. If more than one User Dictionary can be used, the priority is determined in the Desktop Application by the order listed in the Dictionary tab of the System Preferences dialog. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 259

260 MapMarker Utility Programs Configuring User Dictionary as the Only Dictionary with Server With the MapMarker USA Server product, edit the USA_DataManagerSettings.properties file to configure address and user dictionaries and set the priority of these dictionaries. However, if you want to configure the Server product with a user dictionary only (without an address dictionary), you must also copy the following files from the standard address dictionary folder (MapMarker USA v29_data) into the user dictionary folder: ctyst.dir parse.dir us.z9 If you do not copy these files, the Server product generates an initialization error when you configure a user dictionary as the only available dictionary. Additional User Dictionary Considerations Consider the following when working with custom User dictionaries. Data Access License You must still have a valid access license to the data contained in the MapMarker Address Dictionary when you are geocoding against your custom User Dictionary. For example, if you create a dictionary of New York streets and addresses, you must purchase the New York or entire U.S. MapMarker Address Dictionary. CASS Standards You cannot geocode to CASS standards using a custom user dictionary. However, the provided point address dictionaries (Centrus Points, TomTom Points, NAVTEQ Point Addressing) can be geocoded using CASS. Address Range Order MapMarker determines the order of the address range based on a comparison of the start and end addresses. The comparison produces the following results: If the end is greater than the start, the range is ascending If the start is greater than the end, the range is descending If the start is equal to the end, the range is ascending MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 260

261 MapMarker Utility Programs Street Intersections and Customized User Dictionaries When geocoding to street intersections with a custom User Dictionary, MapMarker cannot recognize the intersections if one or more of the segments that make up the intersection does not have an endpoint at the intersection. This can happen when you create the User Dictionary from a customized street table in which some segments that terminate at intersections do not have endpoints (Example 1). Example 1: Intersection in custom User Dictionary does not have endpoints for all segments. MapMarker does not recognize this as an intersection. Example 2: Intersection in TIGER-based Address Dictionary includes endpoints for all segments. MapMarker geocodes to this intersection. MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 261

262 E E U.S. ZIP Code Ranges This table identifies the range of ZIP Codes assigned to states and territories by the U.S. Postal Service. In this appendix: ZIP Code Ranges 263

263 U.S. ZIP Code Ranges ZIP Code Ranges State/Territory Puerto Rico/Virgin Islands ZIP Code Range Massachusetts Rhode Island New Hampshire Maine Vermont Connecticut New Jersey New York Pennsylvania Delaware District of Columbia Maryland Virginia West Virginia North Carolina South Carolina Georgia Florida Alabama MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 263

264 U.S. ZIP Code Ranges State/Territory ZIP Code Range Tennessee Mississippi Kentucky Ohio Indiana Michigan Iowa Wisconsin Minnesota South Dakota North Dakota Montana Illinois Missouri Kansas Nebraska Louisiana Arkansas Oklahoma Texas Colorado Wyoming Idaho Utah MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 264

265 U.S. ZIP Code Ranges State/Territory ZIP Code Range Arizona New Mexico Nevada California Hawaii Oregon Washington Alaska Guam MapMarker USA 29 User Guide 265

266 F F Match Codes and Location Codes This appendix includes the complete list of Match Codes and Location Codes. In this appendix: Match Codes 267 Location Codes 274 Using Status Codes 286

Location Intelligence Geographic Information Systems. MapMarker Plus. Version 31. Release Notes

Location Intelligence Geographic Information Systems. MapMarker Plus. Version 31. Release Notes Location Intelligence Geographic Information Systems MapMarker Plus Version 31 Release Notes Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the

More information

Location Intelligence Geographic Information Systems. MapMarker Plus. Version 30. Release Notes

Location Intelligence Geographic Information Systems. MapMarker Plus. Version 30. Release Notes Location Intelligence Geographic Information Systems MapMarker Plus Version 30 Release Notes Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the

More information

MapMarker Plus Desktop Installation Guide

MapMarker Plus Desktop Installation Guide MapMarker Plus 11.0 Desktop Installation Guide Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its representatives. No

More information

MapMarker Plus Developer Installation Guide

MapMarker Plus Developer Installation Guide MapMarker Plus 11.1 Developer Installation Guide Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its representatives. No

More information

MapMarker Plus 13.2 Release Notes

MapMarker Plus 13.2 Release Notes MapMarker Plus 13.2 Release Notes These Release Notes accompany the MapMarker Plus 13.2 release. This provides information on new features, behavioral changes in the software, fixes for customer-reported

More information

MapMarker Plus 13.1 Release Notes

MapMarker Plus 13.1 Release Notes MapMarker Plus 13.1 Release Notes These Release Notes accompany the MapMarker Plus 13.1 release. This provides information on new features, behavioral changes in the software, fixes for customer-reported

More information

Location Intelligence Geographic Information Systems. MapMarker Plus. Version 30. Installation Guide

Location Intelligence Geographic Information Systems. MapMarker Plus. Version 30. Installation Guide Location Intelligence Geographic Information Systems MapMarker Plus Version 30 Installation Guide Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on

More information

MapMarker Plus 14.2 Release Notes

MapMarker Plus 14.2 Release Notes MapMarker Plus 14.2 Release Notes Americas: Phone: 518 285 6000 Fax: 518 285 6070 Sales: 800 327 8627 Government Sales: 800 619 2333 Technical Support: 518 285 7283 www.mapinfo.com 2009 Pitney Bowes Software

More information

MapMarker Plus 14.0 Release Notes

MapMarker Plus 14.0 Release Notes MapMarker Plus 14.0 Release Notes Americas: Phone: 518 285 6000 Fax: 518 285 6070 Sales: 800 327 8627 Government Sales: 800 619 2333 Technical Support: 518 285 7283 www.mapinfo.com 2008 Pitney Bowes Software

More information

MapMarker Plus. for Windows v Installation Guide

MapMarker Plus. for Windows v Installation Guide MapMarker Plus for Windows v. 10.2 Installation Guide Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its representatives.

More information

MapMarker for Windows Installation Guide

MapMarker for Windows Installation Guide MapMarker for Windows 10.0 Installation Guide Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its representatives. No part

More information

MapMarker 22.1 Release Notes

MapMarker 22.1 Release Notes MapMarker 22.1 Release Notes United States: Phone: 518.285.6000 Fax: 518.285.6070 Sales: 800.327.8627 Government Sales: 800.619.2333 Technical Support: 518.285.7283 Technical Support Fax: 518.285.6080

More information

THE PREMIER GEOCODING ANALYZING BUSINESS DATA.

THE PREMIER GEOCODING ANALYZING BUSINESS DATA. THE PREMIER GEOCODING PRODUCT FOR MAPPING AND ANALYZING BUSINESS DATA www.mapinfo.com Put MapMarker Plus To Work for You Customer location information is a strategic asset. To make the most of this asset,

More information

MapMarker Australia v14 Data v Release Notes

MapMarker Australia v14 Data v Release Notes MapMarker Australia v14 Data v2009.10 Release Notes United States: Phone: 518.285.6000 Fax: 518.285.6070 Sales: 800.327.8627 Government Sales: 800.619.2333 Technical Support: 518.285.7283 Technical Support

More information

MapMarker Canada 9.3 Release Notes

MapMarker Canada 9.3 Release Notes MapMarker Canada 9.3 Release Notes These Release Notes accompany the MapMarker Canada 9.3 release. This provides information on new features, behavioral changes in the software, fixes for customer-reported

More information

MapMarker Canada 10.0 Release Notes

MapMarker Canada 10.0 Release Notes MapMarker Canada 10.0 Release Notes United States: Phone: 518.285.6000 Fax: 518.285.6070 Sales: 800.327.8627 Government Sales: 800.619.2333 Technical Support: 518.285.7283 Technical Support Fax: 518.285.6080

More information

MapMarker Plus Canada 9 Release Notes

MapMarker Plus Canada 9 Release Notes MapMarker Plus Canada 9 Release Notes Americas: Phone: 518 285 6000 Fax: 518 285 6070 Sales: 800 327 8627 Government Sales: 800 619 2333 Technical Support: 518 285 7283 www.mapinfo.com 2008 Pitney Bowes

More information

MapMarker Canada 10.2 Release Notes

MapMarker Canada 10.2 Release Notes MapMarker Canada 10.2 Release Notes United States: Phone: 518.285.6000 Fax: 518.285.6070 Sales: 800.327.8627 Government Sales: 800.619.2333 Technical Support: 518.285.7283 Technical Support Fax: 518.285.6080

More information

MapMarker Canada 10.3 Release Notes

MapMarker Canada 10.3 Release Notes MapMarker Canada 10.3 Release Notes Canada: Phone: 416.594.5200 Fax: 416.594.5201 Sales: 800.268.3282 Technical Support:.518.285.7283 Technical Support Fax: 518.285.6080 pbinsight.ca United States: Phone:

More information

MapMarker Plus 13.0 Release Notes

MapMarker Plus 13.0 Release Notes MapMarker Plus 13.0 Release Notes These Release Notes accompany the MapMarker Plus 13.0 release. This provides information on new features, behavioral changes in the software, fixes for customer-reported

More information

MapMarker USA v25.1 Release Notes

MapMarker USA v25.1 Release Notes MapMarker USA v25.1 Release Notes United States: Phone: 518.285.6000 Fax: 518.285.6070 Sales: 800.327.8627 Government Sales: 800.619.2333 Technical Support: 518.285.7283 Technical Support Fax: 518.285.6080

More information

MapMarker USA v24.1 Release Notes

MapMarker USA v24.1 Release Notes MapMarker USA v24.1 Release Notes United States: Phone: 518.285.6000 Fax: 518.285.6070 Sales: 800.327.8627 Government Sales: 800.619.2333 Technical Support: 518.285.7283 Technical Support Fax: 518.285.6080

More information

MapMarker Geocoding Cartridge for Oracle

MapMarker Geocoding Cartridge for Oracle MapMarker Geocoding Cartridge for Oracle Version 4.0 USA LAYER USER GUIDE Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor

More information

Envinsa. Version 4.4 USER DICTIONARY GUIDE

Envinsa. Version 4.4 USER DICTIONARY GUIDE Envinsa Version 4.4 USER DICTIONARY GUIDE Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its representatives. No part

More information

MAILERS+4 Quick Start Guide

MAILERS+4 Quick Start Guide Quick Start Guide MAILERS+4 Quick Start Guide Contents System Requirements... 1 Where To Find Help... 2 Online Help User s Guide Online Tutorials Melissa Data Web Site Call Us Toll Free The MAILERS+4 Interface...

More information

Release Notes. MapMarker Canada. Version 15. Table of Contents. Location Intelligence Geographic Information Systems

Release Notes. MapMarker Canada. Version 15. Table of Contents. Location Intelligence Geographic Information Systems Location Intelligence Geographic Information Systems MapMarker Canada Version 15 Release Notes This Release Notes document accompanies the MapMarker Canada 15.0 release and describes new features, operating

More information

Installing and Running a Data Quality Loqate CASS Address Application

Installing and Running a Data Quality Loqate CASS Address Application Installing and Running a Data Quality Loqate CASS Address Application This use case describes how to install and run a Data Quality (DQ) Loqate address application that supports the Coding Accuracy Support

More information

Local Update of Census Addresses (LUCA)

Local Update of Census Addresses (LUCA) Local Update of Census Addresses (LUCA) Version 1.0 GeoEnrichment Table of Contents 1 - Introduction Local Update of Census Addresses (LUCA) 4 Installation 4 2 - Data Layouts Record Format 6 1 - Introduction

More information

AnySite. Australia. Install Guide. AnySite v9.1 Install Guide

AnySite. Australia. Install Guide. AnySite v9.1 Install Guide AnySite Australia Install Guide AnySite v9.1 Install Guide TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction... 4 Product Inventory Chapter 2: Before You Begin... 6 Permissions System Requirements Default Install

More information

MapMarker NZL v4.5 Release Notes

MapMarker NZL v4.5 Release Notes MapMarker NZL v4.5 Release Notes Asia Pacific/Australia: Phone: +61.2.9437.6255 Fax: +61.2.9439.1773 Technical Support: 1.800.648.899 pbinsight.com.au These MapMarker NZL v4.5 Release Notes contain information

More information

Experience extraordinary merge/purge power

Experience extraordinary merge/purge power 2017 Experience extraordinary merge/purge power MatchUp Quick Start Guide COPYRIGHT Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Companies, names, and data used in examples herein

More information

Spectrum Miner. Version 8.0. Release Notes

Spectrum Miner. Version 8.0. Release Notes Spectrum Miner Version 8.0 Copyright 2017 Pitney Bowes Software Inc. All rights reserved. MapInfo and Group 1 Software are trademarks of Pitney Bowes Software Inc. All other marks and trademarks are property

More information

ADVANCED DATA QUALITY DATA DICTIONARY

ADVANCED DATA QUALITY DATA DICTIONARY ADVANCED DATA QUALITY DATA DICTIONARY TABLE OF CONTENTS ADVANCED DATA QUALITY OVERVIEW... 3 ADDRESSMAX... 3 NCOA Link... 3 LACS LINK... 3 DPV TM... 4 DSF 2... 7 ADQ REFERENCE DATABASE.8 HARTE-HANKS CHANGE

More information

GeocodeDVD User Guide

GeocodeDVD User Guide GeoLytics GeocodeDVD User Guide Installation 1 Introduction 2 How does GeocodeDVD work? 2 Interface layout of the screen 2 Manual Geocoding 3 Batch Geocoding 5 Geocoding Options Optimizing Your Results

More information

Match and Location Codes

Match and Location Codes Centrus GeoStan Match and Location Codes Version 28.00 For Windows, UNIX/Linux, z/os April 2015 2015 Pitney Bowes Software Inc. All rights reserved. Pitney Bowes Software Inc. is a wholly-owned subsidiary

More information

Technology Platform. Spectrum. Version Enterprise Tax Guide

Technology Platform. Spectrum. Version Enterprise Tax Guide Spectrum Version 11.0 Technology Platform Table of Contents 1 - Introduction Enterprise Tax Module 4 Enterprise Tax Databases 5 2 - Assign GeoTAX Info Geocoding Options 71 Output Data Options 72 Preview

More information

MapMarker Canada 11.9 Release Notes

MapMarker Canada 11.9 Release Notes MapMarker Canada 11.9 Release Notes Canada: Phone: 416.594.5200 Fax: 416.594.5201 Sales: 800.268.3282 Technical Support:.518.285.7283 Technical Support Fax: 518.285.6080 pbinsight.ca United States: Phone:

More information

MapMarker Canada 11.5 Release Notes

MapMarker Canada 11.5 Release Notes MapMarker Canada 11.5 Release Notes Canada: Phone: 416.594.5200 Fax: 416.594.5201 Sales: 800.268.3282 Technical Support:.518.285.7283 Technical Support Fax: 518.285.6080 pbinsight.ca United States: Phone:

More information

Spectrum Technology Platform

Spectrum Technology Platform Spectrum Technology Platform Version 10.0 SP1 Table of Contents Auxiliary File Layout 115 1 - Enterprise Geocoding Module Enterprise Geocoding Module 4 - Geocode US Address Input 16 Options Output 36 Reports

More information

MapInfo ProViewer 11.0 USER GUIDE

MapInfo ProViewer 11.0 USER GUIDE MapInfo ProViewer 11.0 USER GUIDE Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its representatives. No part of this

More information

MapMarker. v28.0 RELEASE NOTES

MapMarker. v28.0 RELEASE NOTES MapMarker v28.0 RELEASE NOTES Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its representatives. No part of this document

More information

MAPLOGIC CORPORATION. GIS Software Solutions. Getting Started. With MapLogic Layout Manager

MAPLOGIC CORPORATION. GIS Software Solutions. Getting Started. With MapLogic Layout Manager MAPLOGIC CORPORATION GIS Software Solutions Getting Started With MapLogic Layout Manager Getting Started with MapLogic Layout Manager 2008 MapLogic Corporation All Rights Reserved 330 West Canton Ave.,

More information

CASS Cycle L ( ) Certification: Frequently Asked Questions

CASS Cycle L ( ) Certification: Frequently Asked Questions CASS Cycle L (2007-2008) Certification: Frequently Asked Questions Q. What is CASS Cycle L? A. CASS Cycle L is the next regularly scheduled update of address-matching software. The USPS requires address-matching

More information

MAPLOGIC CORPORATION. GIS Software Solutions. Getting Started. With MapLogic Layout Manager

MAPLOGIC CORPORATION. GIS Software Solutions. Getting Started. With MapLogic Layout Manager MAPLOGIC CORPORATION GIS Software Solutions Getting Started With MapLogic Layout Manager Getting Started with MapLogic Layout Manager 2011 MapLogic Corporation All Rights Reserved 330 West Canton Ave.,

More information

Getting Started with MapInfo Professional Hands On Session 1D

Getting Started with MapInfo Professional Hands On Session 1D In this session, the following topics will be covered: Open a DBF file Create Points Geocode to 5 digit ZIPCodes Use Query > Select Use the Select Tools Create a Thematic Map The Layout Window MapWorld

More information

Version Installation and User Guide

Version Installation and User Guide IBM Cognos 8 Business Intelligence Map Manager Version 8.4.1 Installation and User Guide Product Information This document applies to IBM Cognos 8 Version 8.4.1 and may also apply to subsequent releases.

More information

Quick Start Guide. Takes only a few minutes to read S. De Anza Blvd., Suite #106 San Jose, CA Phone: (408) Fax: (408)

Quick Start Guide. Takes only a few minutes to read S. De Anza Blvd., Suite #106 San Jose, CA Phone: (408) Fax: (408) Quick Start Guide Takes only a few minutes to read 1340 S. De Anza Blvd., Suite #106 San Jose, CA 95129 Phone: (408) 872-3103 Fax: (408) 861-9601 Welcome to AddressGrabber Suite! Thank you for choosing

More information

Spectrum Technology Platform. Version 9.0. Geocoding Guide for Malaysia

Spectrum Technology Platform. Version 9.0. Geocoding Guide for Malaysia Spectrum Technology Platform Version 9.0 Geocoding Guide for Malaysia Contents Chapter 1: Geocode Address Global...5 Input...6 Input Fields...6 Address Input Guidelines...7 Single Line Input...7 Street

More information

Relativity Designer Installation Guide

Relativity Designer Installation Guide Liant Software Corporation Relativity Designer Installation Guide Version 5 Copyright 1994-2003 by Liant Software Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A. No part of this publication may be

More information

Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its

Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its v.3.0 User s Guide Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its representatives. No part of this document may be

More information

MapMarker Plus 10.2 Release Notes

MapMarker Plus 10.2 Release Notes MapMarker Plus 10.2 Table of Contents Introduction............................................................... 1 System Requirements...................................................... 1 System Recommendations..................................................

More information

Overview of SAS/GIS Software

Overview of SAS/GIS Software 3 CHAPTER 1 Overview of SAS/GIS Software Introduction to Geographic Information Systems 3 Features of SAS Software 4 Data in SAS/GIS Applications 5 Spatial Data 5 Spatial Data Layers 6 Spatial Data Coverages

More information

MapMarker Data Installer

MapMarker Data Installer MapMarker Data Installer United States: Phone: 518.285.6000 Fax: 518.285.6070 Sales: 800.327.8627 Government Sales: 800.619.2333 Technical Support: 518.285.7283 Technical Support Fax: 518.285.6080 pbinsight.com

More information

DSF 2 PRODUCT LICENSEE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

DSF 2 PRODUCT LICENSEE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. General 1.1 There are over 165 million address records in the United States Postal Service address database. The DSF 2 Product identifies whether a ZIP + 4 coded address is currently represented in

More information

SAS Data Integration Studio 3.3. User s Guide

SAS Data Integration Studio 3.3. User s Guide SAS Data Integration Studio 3.3 User s Guide The correct bibliographic citation for this manual is as follows: SAS Institute Inc. 2006. SAS Data Integration Studio 3.3: User s Guide. Cary, NC: SAS Institute

More information

Introducing ArcScan for ArcGIS

Introducing ArcScan for ArcGIS Introducing ArcScan for ArcGIS An ESRI White Paper August 2003 ESRI 380 New York St., Redlands, CA 92373-8100, USA TEL 909-793-2853 FAX 909-793-5953 E-MAIL info@esri.com WEB www.esri.com Copyright 2003

More information

Getting Started With LP360

Getting Started With LP360 Getting Started With LP360 12/22/2015 1 Contents What is LP360?... 3 System Requirements... 3 Installing LP360... 4 How to Enable the LP360 Extension... 4 How to Display the LP360 Toolbar... 4 How to Import

More information

MapMarker Canada Release Notes

MapMarker Canada Release Notes MapMarker Canada 11.11 Release Notes Canada: Phone: 416.594.5200 Fax: 416.594.5201 Sales: 800.268.3282 Technical Support:.518.285.7283 Technical Support Fax: 518.285.6080 www.pb.com/software United States:

More information

GIS Basics for Urban Studies

GIS Basics for Urban Studies GIS Basics for Urban Studies Date: March 21, 2018 Contacts: Mehdi Aminipouri, Graduate Peer GIS Faciliator, SFU Library (maminipo@sfu.ca) Keshav Mukunda, GIS & Map Librarian Librarian for Geography (kmukunda@sfu.ca)

More information

ZipAssist For Microsoft Dynamics GP, 2010

ZipAssist For Microsoft Dynamics GP, 2010 ZipAssist For Microsoft Dynamics GP, 2010 Version 11.00.25 ZipAssist INSTALLING ZIPASSIST... 4 INSTALLING ZIPASSIST DATA FILES... 4 INSTALLING ZIPASSIST CLIENT... 4 REGISTERING THE SOFTWARE... 7 CUSTOMER

More information

SAS Web Report Studio 3.1

SAS Web Report Studio 3.1 SAS Web Report Studio 3.1 User s Guide SAS Documentation The correct bibliographic citation for this manual is as follows: SAS Institute Inc. 2006. SAS Web Report Studio 3.1: User s Guide. Cary, NC: SAS

More information

Spectrum Version 12.0 SP1. Technology Platform. Siebel Module User Guide

Spectrum Version 12.0 SP1. Technology Platform. Siebel Module User Guide Spectrum Version 12.0 SP1 Technology Platform Table of Contents 1 - Introduction to the Siebel Module Siebel Module 4 Siebel Module Services 6 Siebel Module Databases 6 2 - Integrating Siebel with Spectrum

More information

MapMarker Standard 10.0 Release Notes

MapMarker Standard 10.0 Release Notes MapMarker Standard 10.0 Release Notes Table of Contents Introduction............................................................... 1 System Requirements......................................................

More information

If you are familiar with the RDS CASS Certification process, you know that you

If you are familiar with the RDS CASS Certification process, you know that you NCOALINK PROCESSING According to the United States Postal Service (USPS), over 40 million United States residents change their address annually. Probably several of those residents are listed in your database.

More information

Geocoding Reference USA data in ArcMap 9.3

Geocoding Reference USA data in ArcMap 9.3 Tufts GIS Tip Sheet Geocoding Reference USA data in ArcMap 9.3 Written by Barbara Parmenter Revised 3/1/2011 In this exercise, you will map businesses or services for a town in the Boston metropolitan

More information

AIS VIEWER USER S GUIDE Version April 2016

AIS VIEWER USER S GUIDE Version April 2016 Address Information System Product AIS VIEWER USER S GUIDE Version 1.07.05.01 April 2016 Address Management National Customer Support Center United States Postal Service 225 N. Humphreys Blvd Ste 501 Memphis,

More information

SyncFirst Standard. Quick Start Guide User Guide Step-By-Step Guide

SyncFirst Standard. Quick Start Guide User Guide Step-By-Step Guide SyncFirst Standard Quick Start Guide Step-By-Step Guide How to Use This Manual This manual contains the complete documentation set for the SyncFirst system. The SyncFirst documentation set consists of

More information

Chapter 7. Geocoding in ArcGIS Desktop (ArcMap)

Chapter 7. Geocoding in ArcGIS Desktop (ArcMap) Chapter 7 Geocoding in ArcGIS Desktop (ArcMap) Summary: In many cases, online geocoding services are all you will need to convert addresses and other location data into geographic data. When you have a

More information

Location Intelligence Infrastructure Asset Management. Confirm. Confirm Mapping Link to MapInfo Professional Version v18.00b.am

Location Intelligence Infrastructure Asset Management. Confirm. Confirm Mapping Link to MapInfo Professional Version v18.00b.am Location Intelligence Infrastructure Asset Management Confirm Confirm Mapping Link to MapInfo Professional Version v18.00b.am Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not

More information

Geodatabases. Dr. Zhang SPRING 2016 GISC /03/2016

Geodatabases. Dr. Zhang SPRING 2016 GISC /03/2016 Geodatabases Dr. Zhang SPRING 2016 GISC 1401 10/03/2016 Using and making maps Navigating GIS maps Map design Working with spatial data Spatial data infrastructure Interactive maps Map Animations Map layouts

More information

SIMATIC Automation License Manager Manual 02/2008 A5E

SIMATIC Automation License Manager Manual 02/2008 A5E s Contents SIMATIC Automation License Manager Product Overview 1 Installation 2 Working with the Automation License Manager 3 Glossar Index Manual 02/2008 A5E02128430-01 Safety Guidelines This manual contains

More information

1. Open the New American FactFinder using this link:

1. Open the New American FactFinder using this link: Exercises for Mapping and Using US Census Data MIT GIS Services, IAP 2012 More information, including a comparison of tools available through the MIT Libraries, can be found at: http://libraries.mit.edu/guides/types/census/tools-overview.html

More information

Smart Barcoder User Guide

Smart Barcoder User Guide Smart Barcoder User Guide Updated June, 2018 Copyright 2018 Intelligent Mail Barcode Setup Software Table of Contents General User Information... 4 What Smart Barcoder does... 4 Postal Wizard certification...

More information

MapInfo Geocoding Cartridge. User s Guide

MapInfo Geocoding Cartridge. User s Guide MapInfo Geocoding Cartridge User s Guide Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of MapInfo or its representatives. No part of this

More information

GETTING STARTED GUIDE

GETTING STARTED GUIDE GETTING STARTED GUIDE Copyright notice: 2010 Schlumberger Water Services. All rights reserved. No portion of the contents of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means

More information

ER/Studio Business Architect

ER/Studio Business Architect Product Documentation ER/Studio Business Architect Installation Guide 2nd Edition Version 1.6.1 Published August 2010 2010 Embarcadero Technologies, Inc. Embarcadero, the Embarcadero Technologies logos,

More information

Georeferencing. Georeferencing: = linking a layer or dataset with spatial coordinates. Registration: = lining up layers with each other

Georeferencing. Georeferencing: = linking a layer or dataset with spatial coordinates. Registration: = lining up layers with each other Georeferencing How do we make sure all our data layers line up? Georeferencing: = linking a layer or dataset with spatial coordinates Registration: = lining up layers with each other Rectification: The

More information

FINANCE MANAGER. Bidding Manual Finance Manager.

FINANCE MANAGER. Bidding Manual Finance Manager. FINANCE MANAGER Bidding Manual 2009 Finance Manager Table of Contents Start Page... 5 Setup Which Files Should Be Completed First?... 7 Item Categories... 8 Unit of Measure... 11 Buildings... 13 Requestors...

More information

Location Intelligence Component

Location Intelligence Component Location Intelligence Component Version 1.0 for Business Objects XI 3.0 USER GUIDE Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the

More information

West Virginia Site Locator and West Virginia Street Locator

West Virginia Site Locator and West Virginia Street Locator West Virginia Site Locator and West Virginia Street Locator West Virginia GIS Technical Center Final Report Prepared August 2009 Revised June 2010 Revised February 2014 West Virginia GIS Technical Center

More information

Inmagic DB/TextWorks 9.00 Installation and Upgrade Notes

Inmagic DB/TextWorks 9.00 Installation and Upgrade Notes Inmagic DB/TextWorks 9.00 Installation and Upgrade Notes Thank you for purchasing Inmagic DB/TextWorks. This document is for new DB/TextWorks installations and sites that are upgrading to version 9.00.

More information

Location Intelligence Component

Location Intelligence Component version 1.0 for Business Objects XIR2 in support of Service Pack 4 RELEASE NOTES Americas: Phone: 518 285 6000 Fax: 518 285 6070 Sales: 800 327 8627 Government Sales: 800 619 2333 Technical Support: 518

More information

Questions and Answers

Questions and Answers Questions and Answers Using the Questions and Answers Feature of the Bid Express Service March 2014 Prepared by: Address: 5700 SW 34th Street, Suite 1235, Gainesville, Florida 32608-5371 Phone: (352) 381-4400

More information

GeoLytics. User Guide. Online Demographic Database

GeoLytics. User Guide. Online Demographic Database GeoLytics Online Demographic Database User Guide Introduction 1 Steps to Create a Report and Export Data 1 Creating & Naming a Request 2 Selecting an Area 3 Selecting the Subarea 5 Selecting Counts & Variables

More information

Inmagic DB/TextWorks Installation and Upgrade Notes

Inmagic DB/TextWorks Installation and Upgrade Notes Inmagic DB/TextWorks 12.00 Installation and Upgrade Notes This document is intended for new DB/TextWorks installations and sites that are upgrading to version 12.00. DB/TextWorks is a content management

More information

Concord Print2Fax. Complete User Guide. Table of Contents. Version 3.0. Concord Technologies

Concord Print2Fax. Complete User Guide. Table of Contents. Version 3.0. Concord Technologies Concord Print2Fax Complete User Guide Table of Contents Version 3.0 Concord Technologies 2018 1 Concord Technologies concordfax.com premiumsupport@concordfax.com Copyright 2017 CONCORD Technologies. All

More information

Envinsa. Coordinate Geometry Service Reference

Envinsa. Coordinate Geometry Service Reference Envinsa Coordinate Geometry Service Reference Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its representatives. No part

More information

DesignPro Tools for Xerox Elixir Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved.

DesignPro Tools for Xerox Elixir Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. Follow the Crop Marks DesignPro Tools for Xerox Getting Started Guide C 1998-2008 Elixir Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. Elixir Technologies Corporation 721 East Main Street Ventura, CA

More information

New User Orientation PARTICIPANT WORKBOOK

New User Orientation PARTICIPANT WORKBOOK New User Orientation PARTICIPANT WORKBOOK INTEGRATED SOFTWARE SERIES New User Orientation PARTICIPANT WORKBOOK Version 2.0 Copyright 2005 2009. Interactive Financial Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

More information

Address Information System Products Technical Guide

Address Information System Products Technical Guide Address Information System Products Technical Guide June 2002 NATIONAL CUSTOMER SUPPORT CENTER UNITED STATES POSTAL SERVICE 6060 PRIMACY PKWY STE 201 MEMPHIS TN 38188-0001 (800) 238-3150 122 Address Information

More information

TRIMBLE ACCUBID CLASSIC 14

TRIMBLE ACCUBID CLASSIC 14 RELEASE NOTES TRIMBLE ACCUBID CLASSIC 14 This document provides basic information about new features, enhancements, and modifications in version 14 of the Trimble Accubid Classic software. More detailed

More information

MapInfo. Line Style Editor User Guide

MapInfo. Line Style Editor User Guide MapInfo Line Style Editor User Guide Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its representatives. No part of this

More information

Ephesoft Transact. Version Release Notes. September Ephesoft Transact Release Notes Version Pre - release Draft

Ephesoft Transact. Version Release Notes. September Ephesoft Transact Release Notes Version Pre - release Draft Ephesoft Transact Release Notes Version 4.5.0.0 Pre - release Draft Ephesoft Transact Release Notes Version 4.5.0.2 September 2018 Copyright 2018 by Ephesoft, Inc. All rights reserved Copyright 2018 by

More information

Mn/DOT MnCMAT Crash Analysis Application Help

Mn/DOT MnCMAT Crash Analysis Application Help Mn/DOT MnCMAT Crash Analysis Application Contents Login... 5 User Login Dialog... 5 Login... 5 Request Access Dialog... 5 Forgotten Password Dialog... 6 Create/Open Project... 7 Create/Open Project Dialog...

More information

Geocoding vs. Add XY Data using Reference USA data in ArcMap

Geocoding vs. Add XY Data using Reference USA data in ArcMap Geocoding vs. Add XY Data using Reference USA data in ArcMap 10.4.1 Written by Barbara Parmenter. Revised by Carolyn Talmadge 2/27/2017 GETTING BUSINESS DATA FROM REFERENCE USA BY NAICS AND CITY... 2 MODIFY

More information

Data Import Guide DBA Software Inc.

Data Import Guide DBA Software Inc. Contents 3 Table of Contents 1 Introduction 4 2 Data Import Instructions 5 3 Data Import - Customers 10 4 Data Import - Customer Contacts 16 5 Data Import - Delivery Addresses 19 6 Data Import - Suppliers

More information

1 Installing the Address Verification Server

1 Installing the Address Verification Server Oracle Enterprise Data Quality Installing and Upgrading Oracle Enterprise Data Quality Address Verification Server Release 14.x, 15.x, 16.x E62411-03 March 2016 Oracle Enterprise Data Quality (EDQ) Address

More information

Contents. 1 Introduction... 2 Introduction to Installing and Configuring LEI... 4 Upgrading NotesPump to LEI...

Contents. 1 Introduction... 2 Introduction to Installing and Configuring LEI... 4 Upgrading NotesPump to LEI... Contents 1 Introduction... Organization of this Manual... Related Documentation... LEI and DECS Documentation... Other Documentation... Getting Started with Lotus Enterprise Integrator... 2 Introduction

More information

Georeferencing Tutorials and Recommended Practices

Georeferencing Tutorials and Recommended Practices March 21, 2008 Georeferencing Tutorials and Recommended Practices Topic Page Introduction 1 Preparing address data for georefernecing 1 Available address geocoders, pros and cons 1 Using Batchgeocode.com

More information

SDC PLATINUM QUICK START GUIDE

SDC PLATINUM QUICK START GUIDE SDC PLATINUM QUICK START GUIDE Date of issue: 21 May 2012 Contents Contents About this Document... 1 Intended Readership... 1 In this Document... 1 Feedback... 1 Chapter 1 Overview... 2 Get Started...

More information